Acura 2012 Tsx Owners Manual

Manual L11313OM 2013 Acura TSX Owners Manual | Manual Device

2015-09-07

: Acura Acura-2012-Tsx-Owners-Manual-761960 acura-2012-tsx-owners-manual-761960 acura pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 325 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Contents
This owner’s manual should be considered a permanent part of the
vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
This owner’s manual covers all models of your vehicle. You may find
descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your
particular model.
Images throughout this owner’s manual (including the front
cover) represent features and equipment that are available on
some, but not all, models. Your particular model may not have
some of these features.
This owner’s manual is for vehicles sold in the United States
and Canada.
The information and specifications included in this publication
were in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor
Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change
specifications or design at any time without notice and without
incurring any obligation.
2Safe Driving P. 21
For Safe Driving P. 22 Seat Belts P. 26 Airbags P. 33
2Instrument Panel P. 63
Indicators P. 64 Gauges and Multi-Information Display P. 75
2Controls P. 87
Setting the Clock P. 88 Locking and Unlocking the Doors P. 89
Opening and Closing the Moonroof P. 103
Adjusting the Seats P. 116
2Features P. 137
Audio System P. 138 Audio System Basic Operation P. 141
General Information on the Audio System P. 161
2Driving P. 181
Before Driving P. 182 Towing a Trailer P. 187
Refueling P. 215 Fuel Economy P. 218
2Maintenance P. 221
Before Performing Maintenance P. 222 Maintenance MinderTM P. 225
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 257
Climate Control System Maintenance P. 270
2Handling the Unexpected P. 275
Tools P. 276 If a Tire Goes Flat P. 277
Overheating P. 288 Indicator, Coming On/Blinking P. 290
When You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door P. 300
2Information P. 303
Specifications P. 304 Identification Numbers P. 308
Emissions Testing P. 311 Warranty Coverages P. 313
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 0 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
2013 TSX
Online Reference Owner's Manual
00X31-TL1-6400
© 2012 American Honda Motor Co., Inc - All Rights Reserved
QRG Quick Reference Guide
Index Index
Book Table of Contents
TOC Chapter Table of Contents
Navigation Key
Contents
Child Safety P. 48 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 60 Safety Labels P. 61
Opening and Closing the Trunk P. 95 Security System P. 98 Opening and Closing the Windows P. 100
Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel P. 104 Adjusting the Mirror P. 114
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items P. 125 Climate Control System P. 133
Audio Error Messages P. 158 Audio Remote Controls P. 160
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver P. 165 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 167 Compass* P. 179
When Driving P. 191 Braking P. 210 Parking Your Vehicle P. 214
Accessories and Modifications P. 219
Maintenance Under the Hood P. 229 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 247
Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 259 Battery P. 268 Remote Transmitter Care P. 269
Cleaning P. 271
Engine Does Not Start P. 283 Jump Starting P. 284 Shift Lever Does Not Move P. 287
Fuses P. 294 Emergency Towing P. 299
When You Cannot Open the Trunk P. 301
Devices that Emit Radio Waves P. 309 Reporting Safety Defects P. 310
Authorized Manuals P. 315 Client Service Information P. 316
Quick Reference Guide P. 2
Safe Driving P. 21
Instrument Panel P. 63
Controls P. 87
Features P. 137
Driving P. 181
Maintenance P. 221
Handling the Unexpected P. 275
Information P. 303
Index P. 317
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 1 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
2012 TSX
Quick Reference Guide
Book Table of Contents
Chapter Table of Contents
Navigation Key
Index
2
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 TSX
Quick Reference Guide
Visual Index
❙System Indicators (P64)
❙Gauges (P75)
❙Navigation System*
() See Navigation System Manual
❙Audio System (P138)
❙Hazard Warning Button
❙Climate Control System (P133)
❙Rear Window Defogger/
Heated Door Mirror Button
(P110)
❙Seat Heater Switches (P132)
❙Steering Wheel Adjustments
(P113)
❙Multi-Information Display (P76)
❙ (Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®)
System OFF) Button (P204)
❙Ignition Switch (P104)
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 2 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
* Not available on all models
3
❙Headlights/Turn Signals (P105)
❙Fog Lights (P107)
❙Paddle Shifter (Shift down)
*(P197)
❙Navigation System Voice Control Buttons* () See Navigation System Manual
❙Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® System Voice Control Buttons (P167)
❙Horn
❙Remote Audio Control Buttons (P160)
❙Paddle Shifter (Shift up)
*(P197)
❙SEL/RESET Button (P76)
❙ (Information) Button (P76)
❙Wipers/Washers (P108)
❙Cruise Control Buttons (P201)
* Not available on all models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 3 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
(P198)
(P198)
QRG
Index
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 TSX
Visual Index
4
❙Door Mirror Controls
(P114)
❙Parking Brake (P210)
❙Glove Box (P126)
❙Rearview Mirror (P114)
❙Shift Lever
Automatic Transmission
(P194)
Manual Transmission
(P199)
❙Driver Side Fuse Box (P294)
❙Passenger Side Fuse Box
(P295)
❙Driver’s Pocket
❙Trunk Release (P95)
❙Power Window Switches (P100)
❙Driving Position Memory System Buttons* (P111)
❙Driver’s Front Airbag (P36)
❙Hood Release Handle (P 231)
❙Passenger’s Front Airbag
(P36)
❙Accessory Power Socket
(P129)
❙Power Door Lock Master Switch
(Unlocking Fuel Fill Door) (P93)
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 4 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
* Not available on all models
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 TSX
5
❙Seat Belt to Secure a Child Seat (P57)
❙Seat Belt Installing a Child Seat (P55)
❙Moonroof Switch (P103)
❙Map Lights (P125)
❙Front Seat (P116)
❙Seat Belts (P26)
❙Side Airbags (P40)
❙Rear Seat (P123)
❙LATCH to Secure a Child Seat (P53)
❙Ceiling Light (P125)
❙Side Curtain Airbags (P43)
❙Coat Hook (P130)
❙Grab Handle
❙HomeLink® Button (P165)
❙Sunglasses Holder (P131)
❙Sun Visors
❙Vanity Mirrors
❙USB Adapter Cable
(P139)
❙Accessory Power Socket
(P129)
❙Auxiliary Input Jack
(P140)
❙Center Pocket*
* Not available on all models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 5 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 TSX
Visual Index
6
❙Maintenance Under the Hood (P229)
❙Windshield Wipers (P108)
❙Tires (P259)
❙Fog Lights (P107)
❙Door Lock/Unlock Control (P91)
❙Side Turn Signal Lights (P105)
❙Headlights (P105)
❙Front Turn Signal/Parking/
Side Marker Lights (P105)
❙How to Refuel (P216)
❙High-Mount Brake Light (P256)
❙Emergency Trunk Release Lever (P97)
❙Opening/Closing the Trunk (P95)
❙Back-Up Lights (P253)
❙Brake/Taillights (P253)
❙Rear Side Marker Lights (P253)
❙Door Mirrors (P114)
❙Trunk Release Switch (P96)
❙Rear Turn Signal Lights (P253)
❙Rearview Camera*
() See Navigation System Manual
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 6 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
(P257)
(P253)
(P247)
(P252)
(P277)
(P251)
QRG
Index
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 TSX
* Not available on all models
7
Safe Driving (P21)
Airbags (P33)
●Your vehicle is fitted with airbags to help protect you and
your passengers during a moderate-to-severe collision.
Child Safety (P48)
●All children 12 and younger should be seated in the rear seat.
●Smaller children should be properly restrained in a forward-facing child seat.
●Infants must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat.
Exhaust Gas Hazard (P60)
●Your vehicle emits dangerous exhaust gases that contain
carbon monoxide. Do not run the engine in confined spaces
where carbon monoxide gas can accumulate.
Before Driving Checklist (P25)
●Before driving, check that the front seats, head restraints,
steering wheel, and mirrors have been properly adjusted.
Seat Belts (P26)
●Fasten your seat belt and sit upright well
back in the seat.
●Check that your passengers are wearing
their seat belts correctly.
Fasten your lap belt as
low as possible.
* Not available on all models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 7 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 TSX
8
Instrument Panel (P63)
System Indicators
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
Anti-lock Brake
System (ABS)
Indicator
Vehicle Stability
Assist (VSA®)
System Indicator
VSA® OFF Indicator Low Tire Pressure/
TPMS Indicator
Electric Power
Steering (EPS)
System Indicator
Lights On Indicator
High Beam Indicator
Fog Light Indicator
Immobilizer System
Indicator
Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator
System Indicators
System Message
Indicator
Parking Brake
and Brake System
Indicator
Supplemental
Restraint System
Indicator
Side Airbag Off
Indicator
Door and Trunk
Open Indicator
CRUISE MAIN
Indicator
Tachometer
Low Fuel IndicatorSecurity System Alarm Indicator
Shift Lever Position Indicator*
Gauges (P 75)
Multi-Information Display (P 76)
System Indicators (P 64)
Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
Gear Position Indicator*
Charging System
Indicator
CRUISE CONTROL
Indicator
Lights Reminders
Multi-Information Display
Speedometer
Fuel Gauge
Temperature Gauge
U.S.
Canada
U.S.
Canada
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 8 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 TSX
* Not available on all models
9
Controls (P 87)
Turn Signals (P105)
Turn Signal Control Lever
Right
Left
Lights (P105)
Wipers and Washers
(P108)
* Not available on all models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 9 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 TSX
10
Steering Wheel (P113)
●To adjust, pull the adjustment lever
towards you, adjust to the desired
position, then lock the lever back in place.
Trunk (P95)
●Push the trunk release on the driver’s
door, or on the remote transmitter. With
the doors unlocked, press the trunk
release switch on the trunk lid to open it.
Power Door Mirrors
(P114)
●With the ignition switch in ON (w, move
the selector switch to L or R.
●Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to adjust the mirror.
●Place the selector switch in the R position
to use the reverse tilt door mirror feature.
Power Windows (P100)
●With the ignition switch in ON (w, open
and close the power windows.
●If the power window lock button is in
the off position, each passenger’s
window can be opened and closed with
its own switch.
●If the power window lock button is in the
on position (indicator is on), each
passenger’s window switch is disabled.
Power Window
Lock Button
Window Switch
Indicator
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 10 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 TSX
11
Climate Control System (P133)
●Press the AUTO button to activate the climate control system.
●Press the ON/OFF button to turn the system on or off.
●Press the button to defrost the windshield.
The climate control system is voice operable. See the navigation system manual for
complete details.
Models with navigation system
(Rear Window Defogger/
Heated Mirror) Button
(Windshield Defroster) Button
A/C (Air Conditioning)
Button
Air flows from dashboard
vents and back of the
center console*.
Air flows from floor and
dashboard vents, and back
of the center console*.
Air flows from floor vents.
Air flows from floor and
windshield defroster vents.
(Recirculation) Button
(Fan Control) Bar
Passenger’s Side
Temperature
Control Switch
SYNC (Synchronized) Button
AUTO Button
Driver’s Side
Temperature
Control Switch
ON/OFF Button MODE Control Button
Clock (P88)
aPress the CLOCK button until the
displayed time begins flashing.
bPress Preset (4 (Hour) or (5 (Minute)
to set the time. Press Preset (6 (Reset)
to set the time to the nearest hour.
cPress the CLOCK button again to set
the time.
The navigation system receives
signals from GPS satellites, updating
the clock automatically.
Models without navigation system
Models with navigation system
* Not available on all models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 11 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 TSX
12
Features (P137)
Audio System (P138)
Audio Display
AM Button
FM Button
SCAN Button
CATEGORY Bar
A.SEL (Auto Select)
Button
(Volume/Power)
Knob
VOL/
CD Slot
AUX Button
CD Button
(CD Eject)
Button
Preset Buttons
SKIP Bar
TITLE Button
(XM®)
Button
MENU Button
Selector KnobRETURN Button
For navigation system operation () See Navigation System Manual
●Audio Remote Controls (P160)
●VOL (volume) Button
Press / to adjust the volume up/
down.
●MODE Button
Press and release to change the audio
mode: FM1/FM2/AM/XM1/XM2/CD/AUX.
●CH (channel) Button
Radio:Press and release to change the
preset station.
Press and hold to select the next or
previous strong station.
CD/USB device:
Press and release to skip to the
beginning of the next song or
return to the beginning of the
current song.
Press and hold to change a folder.
VOL Button
CH Button
MODE Button
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 12 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 TSX
13
Driving (P181)
Release Button
Shift Lever
Depress the brake pedal and press the
release button to move out of (P.
Move the shift lever without
pressing the release button.
Press the release button to move
the shift lever.
Manual Transmission (P199)
Automatic Transmission (P195)
●Shift to (P and depress the brake pedal when starting the
engine.
●Shifting
Park
Turn off or start the engine.
Transmission is locked.
Reverse
Neutral
Transmission is not locked.
Drive
Normal driving. D-paddle
shift mode can be used.
S Position
Sequential shift mode can be
used.
Paddle Shifters (P197)
●Paddle shifters allow you to shift gears much like a manual
transmission (1st through 5th). This is useful for engine braking.
●D-paddle shift mode: The
transmission will shift back
to automatic mode once the
system detects that the
vehicle is cruising.
●Sequential shift mode: Holds
the selected gear, and the M
indicator comes on.
●The selected gear
position is shown in the
instrument panel.
Shift Down (-
Paddle Shifter
Shift Up (+
Paddle Shifter
Selected Gear
Number
M Indicator
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 13 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 TSX
14
VSA® OFF Button (P205)
●The vehicle stability assist (VSA®) system
helps stabilize the vehicle during
cornering, and helps maintain traction
while accelerating on loose or slippery
road surfaces.
●VSA® comes on automatically every time
you start the engine.
●To turn VSA® on or off, press and hold
the button until you hear a beep.
Cruise Control (P201)
●Cruise control allows you to maintain a
set speed without keeping your foot on
the accelerator pedal.
●To use cruise control, press the CRUISE
button, then press DECEL/SET when the
vehicle speed is above 25 mph (40 km/h).
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) (P206)
●TPMS monitors tire pressure.
●TPMS is turned on automatically every
time you start the engine.
Refueling (P 215)
Fuel recommendation:
Premium unleaded gasoline with a pump octane number
91 or higher recommended
Premium unleaded gasoline with a pump octane number
91 or higher required
Fuel tank capacity: 18.5 US gal (70 L)
4-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
aUnlock the driver’s door.
bPress on the edge of the
fuel fill door to make it
pop up slightly.
cTurn the fuel fill cap
slowly to remove the
cap.
dPlace the cap in the
holder on the fuel fill
door.
eAfter refueling, screw
the cap back on until it
clicks at least once.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 14 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 TSX
15
Maintenance (P 221)
Under the Hood (P 229)
●Check engine oil, engine coolant, and windshield washer
fluid. Add when necessary.
●Check brake fluid and clutch fluid.
●Check the battery regularly.
aPull the hood release handle under the corner of the
dashboard.
bLocate the hood latch lever, pull the lever up, and lift up
the hood.
cWhen finished, close the hood and make sure it is firmly
locked in place.
Lights (P247)
●Inspect all lights regularly.
Wiper Blades (P257)
●Replace blades if they leave streaks
across the windshield.
Tires (P259)
●Inspect tires and wheels regularly.
●Check tire pressures regularly.
●Install snow tires for winter driving.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 15 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 TSX
16
Handling the Unexpected (P 275)
Flat Tire (P277)
●Park in a safe location and replace the
flat tire with the compact spare tire in
Indicators Come On
(P290)
●Identify the indicator and consult the
owner’s manual.
Engine Won’t Start (P283)
●If the battery is dead, jump start using a
booster battery.
Blown Fuse (P294)
●Check for a blown fuse if an electrical
device does not operate.
Overheating (P288)
●Park in a safe location. If you do not see
steam under the hood, open the hood,
and let the engine cool down.
Emergency Towing (P299)
●Call a professional towing service if you
need to tow your vehicle.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 16 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 TSX
the trunk.
17
What to Do If
The ignition switch does
not turn from (0 to (q.
Why?
●The steering wheel may be locked.
●Try to turn the steering wheel left and right
while turning the ignition key.
The ignition switch does
not turn from (q to (0 and
I cannot remove the key.
Why?
The shift lever should be moved to (P.
Why does the brake pedal
pulsate slightly when
applying the brakes?
This can occur when the ABS activates, and does not indicate a
problem. Apply firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. Never
pump the brake pedal.
The rear door cannot be
opened from inside the
vehicle. Why?
Check if the childproof lock is in the
lock position. If so, open the rear
door with the outside door handle.
To cancel this function, push the lever
to the unlock position.
Why do the doors lock
after I unlocked the doors
using a remote
transmitter?
If you do not open the doors within 30 seconds, the doors are
relocked automatically for security.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 17 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 TSX
18
Why does the beeper
sound when I open the
driver’s door?
The beeper sounds when:
●The key is left in the ignition switch.
●The exterior lights are left on.
Why does the beeper
sound when I start driving?
The beeper sounds when:
●Driver and/or front passenger are not wearing their seat belts.
●The parking brake lever is not fully released.
Why do I hear a screeching
sound when I apply the
brake pedal?
The brake pads may need to be replaced. Have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer.
Is it possible to use
unleaded gasoline with a
Pump Octane Number
(PON) of 87 or higher on
this vehicle?
If premium unleaded gasoline with a PON of 91 or higher is not
available, you can temporarily use gasoline with a PON of 87 or
higher.
This will result in decreased engine performance, and can cause
occasional metallic knocking noise in the engine.
Unleaded gasoline with a PON of 91 or higher is recommended.
Unleaded gasoline with a PON of 91 or higher is required.
The long-term use of a lower PON gasoline can lead to engine
damage.
4-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 18 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 TSX
19
California Proposition 65 Warning
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s
systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
•How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
•Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
•How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and,
•How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
WARNING: This product contains or emits
chemicals known to the state of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that
have the special equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by
anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the
vehicle owner.
Service Diagnostic Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record
information about powertrain performance. The data can be used
to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians
diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with
data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains
confidential.
California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act
The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this
vehicle may contain perchlorate materials - special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/
As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded
by a symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid
damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.
NOTICE
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 19 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 TSX
20
A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And
operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility.
To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and other information on labels and
in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that
could hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You
must use your own good judgement.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of
forms, including:
●Safety Labels - on the vehicle.
●Safety Messages - preceded by a safety alert symbol 3 and
one of three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
These signal words mean:
●Safety Headings - such as Important Safety Precautions.
●Safety Section - such as Safe Driving.
●Instructions - how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information - please
read it carefully.
3DANGER
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
you don’t follow instructions.
3WARNING
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
you don’t follow instructions.
3CAUTION
You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
instructions.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 20 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 TSX
21
Safe Driving
You can find many safety recommendations throughout this chapter, and throughout this manual.
For Safe Driving
Important Safety Precautions ............. 22
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features............ 24
Seat Belts
About Your Seat Belts........................ 26
Fastening a Seat Belt.......................... 29
Seat Belt Inspection............................ 32
Airbags
Airbag System Components............... 33
Types of Airbags ................................ 36
Front Airbags (SRS) ............................ 36
Side Airbags....................................... 40
Side Curtain Airbags .......................... 43
Airbag System Indicators.................... 44
Airbag Care ....................................... 47
Child Safety
Protecting Child Passengers ............... 48
Safety of Infants and Small Children .. 50
Safety of Larger Children ................... 58
Exhaust Gas Hazard
Carbon Monoxide Gas....................... 60
Safety Labels
Label Locations .................................. 61
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 21 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
22
Safe Driving
For Safe Driving
The following pages explain your vehicle’s safety features and how to use them
properly. The safety precautions below are ones that we consider to be among the
most important.
Important Safety Precautions
■Always wear your seat belt
A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to
supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped
with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly.
■Restrain all children
Children age 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the
front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger
children should use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder seat belt until they can use the
belt properly without a booster seat.
■Be aware of airbag hazards
While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants
who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children,
and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.
■Don’t drink and drive
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to
changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink.
So don’t drink and drive, and don’t let your friends drink and drive, either.
1Important Safety Precautions
Some states, provinces and territories prohibit the use
of cell phones other than hands-free devices by the
driver while driving.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 22 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
23
uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Safety Precautions
■Pay appropriate attention to the task of driving safely
Engaging in cell phone conversation or other activities that keep you from paying
close attention to the road, other vehicles, and pedestrians could lead to a crash.
Remember, situations can change quickly, and only you can decide when it is safe to
divert some attention away from driving.
■Control your speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher
the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds.
Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum
speed posted.
■Keep your vehicle in safe condition
Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous.
To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition
frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 23 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
Safe Driving
TOC
2013 TSX
24
uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle’s Safety Features
Safe Driving
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
The following checklist will help you take an active role in protecting yourself and
your passengers.
1Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Your vehicle is equipped with many features that
work together to help protect you and your
passengers during a crash.
Some features do not require any action on your part.
These include a strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger compartment,
front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering
column, and tensioners that tighten the front seat
belts in a sufficient crash.
However, you and your passengers cannot take full
advantage of these features unless you remain seated
in the correct position and always wear your seat
belts. In fact, some safety features can contribute to
injuries if they are not used properly.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Safety Cage
Crush Zones
Seats and Seat-Backs
Head Restraints
Collapsible Steering Column
Seat Belts
Front Airbags
Side Curtain Airbags
Seat Belt Tensioners
Occupant Position Detection
System (OPDS) Sensor
Side Airbags
6
7
7
8
8
9 9
10
11
Door Locks
12
10
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 24 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
25
uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle’s Safety Features
For the safety of you and your passengers, make a habit of checking these items
each time before you drive.
•After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure all doors are closed and locked.
Locking the doors helps prevent an occupant from being ejected and an outsider
from unexpectedly opening a door.
2Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 93
•Adjust your seat to a position suitable for driving. Be sure the front seats are
adjusted as far to the rear as possible while allowing the driver to control the
vehicle. Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious or fatal injury in a
crash.
2Adjusting the Seats P. 116
•Adjust head restraints to the proper position. Head restraints are most effective
when the center of the head restraint aligns with the center of your head. Taller
persons should adjust their head restraint to the highest position.
2Adjusting the Head Restraints P. 118
•Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly. Confirm that any
passengers are properly belted as well.
2Fastening a Seat Belt P. 29
•Protect children by using seat belts or child seats according to a child’s age, height
and weight.
2Child Safety P. 48
■Safety Checklist
1Safety Checklist
If the door and trunk open indicator is on, a door
and/or the trunk is not completely closed. Close all
doors and the trunk tightly until the indicator goes
off.
2Door and Trunk Open Indicator P. 68
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 25 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Safe Driving
TOC
26
Safe Driving
Seat Belts
About Your Seat Belts
Seat belts are the single most effective safety device because they keep you
connected to the vehicle so that you can take advantage of many built-in safety
features. They also help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the
vehicle, against other passengers, or out of the vehicle. When worn properly, seat
belts also keep your body properly positioned in a crash so that you can take full
advantage of the additional protection provided by the airbags.
In addition, seat belts help protect you in almost every type of crash, including:
-frontal impacts
-side impacts
-rear impacts
-rollovers
■Lap/shoulder seat belts
All five seating positions are equipped with lap/shoulder seat belts with emergency
locking retractors. In normal driving the retractor lets you move freely while keeping
some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop the retractor locks to
restrain your body. The rear seat belts also have a lockable retractor for use with
child seats.
2Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt P. 55
1About Your Seat Belts
Seat belts cannot completely protect you in every
crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your
risk of serious injury.
Most states and all Canadian provinces and territories
require you to wear seat belts.
3
WARNING
Not wearing a seat belt properly increases
the chance of serious injury or death in a
crash, even though your vehicle has
airbags.
Be sure you and your passengers always
wear seat belts and wear them properly.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 26 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
Continued 27
uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
■Proper use of seat belts
Follow these guidelines for proper use:
•All occupants should sit upright, well back in the seat, and remain in that position
for the duration of the trip. Slouching and leaning reduces the effectiveness of
the belt and can increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
•Never place the shoulder part of a lap/shoulder seat belt under your arm or
behind your back. This could cause very serious injuries in a crash.
•Two people should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be very
seriously injured in a crash.
•Do not put any accessories on the seat belts. Devices intended to improve comfort
or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability
and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
Your vehicle monitors front seat belt use. If
the ignition switch is turned to ON (w before
the driver’s seat belt is fastened, a beeper will
sound and the indicator will blink. If the driver
does not fasten the belt before the beeper
stops, the indicator will remain on.
The beeper will also periodically sound and
the indicator will blink while driving until the
driver’s and front passenger’s seat belts are
fastened.
■Seat Belt Reminder
1About Your Seat Belts
If a rear seat passenger moves around and extends
the seat belt, the lockable retractor may activate. If
this happens, release the retractor by unfastening the
seat belt and allow the belt to retract completely.
Then refasten the belt.
1Seat Belt Reminder
The indicator will also come on if a front passenger
does not fasten their seat belt within 6 seconds after
the ignition switch is turned to ON (w.
When no one is sitting in the front passenger’s seat,
or a child or small adult is riding there, the indicator
will not come on.
This is because the weight sensors in the seat cannot
detect their presence.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 27 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Safe Driving
TOC
uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
28
Safe Driving
The front seats are equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners to enhance safety.
The tensioners automatically tighten the front seat belts during a moderate-to-
severe frontal collision, sometimes even if the collision is not severe enough to
inflate the front airbags.
■Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
1Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
The seat belt tensioners can only operate once.
If a tensioner is activated, the SRS indicator will come
on. Have a dealer replace the tensioner and
thoroughly inspect the seat belt system as it may not
offer protection in a subsequent crash.
During a moderate-to-severe side impact, the
tensioner on that side of the vehicle also activates.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 28 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
29
uuSeat Belts uFastening a Seat Belt
Continued
Fastening a Seat Belt
After adjusting a front seat to the proper position, and while sitting upright and well
back in the seat:
2Adjusting the Seats P. 116
1. Pull the seat belt out slowly.
2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then
tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is
secure.
uMake sure that the belt is not twisted or
caught on anything.
1Fastening a Seat Belt
No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat
belt or one that does not appear to be working
correctly. Using a seat belt that is not working
properly may not protect the occupant in a crash.
Have a dealer check the belt as soon as possible.
Never insert any foreign objects into the buckle or
retractor mechanism.
Pull out slowly.
Correct
Seated
Posture.
Latch
Plate
Buckle
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 29 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
Safe Driving
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
30
Safe Driving
3. Position the lap part of the belt as low as
possible across your hips, then pull up on
the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part
fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic
bones take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
4. If necessary, pull up on the belt again to
remove any slack, then check that the belt
rests across the center of your chest and
over your shoulder. This spreads the forces
of a crash over the strongest bones in your
upper body.
The front seats have adjustable shoulder anchors to accommodate taller and shorter
occupants.
1. Move the anchor up and down while
holding the release button.
2. Position the anchor so that the belt rests
across the center of your chest and over
your shoulder.
1Fastening a Seat Belt
To release the belt, push the red PRESS button then
guide the belt by hand until it has retracted
completely.
When exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is out of
the way and will not get caught by closing the door.
3
WARNING
Improperly positioning the seat belts can
cause serious injury or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are properly
positioned before driving.
Lap belt
as low as
possible
■Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor
1Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor
The shoulder anchor height can be adjusted to four
levels. If the belt contacts your neck, lower the height
one level at a time.
After an adjustment, make sure that the shoulder
anchor position is secure.
Push
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 30 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
31
uuSeat Belts uFastening a Seat Belt
If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when
driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt and keep the lap part of the
belt as low as possible across the hips.
■Advice for Pregnant Women
1Advice for Pregnant Women
Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if it is
okay for you to drive.
To reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your
unborn child that can be caused by an inflating front
airbag:
•When driving, sit upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full control of the
vehicle.
•When sitting in the front passenger’s seat, adjust
the seat as far back as possible.
Wear the shoulder belt
across the chest avoiding
the abdomen.
Wear the lap part of the
belt as low as possible
across the hips.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 31 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Safe Driving
TOC
32
uuSeat BeltsuSeat Belt Inspection
Safe Driving
Seat Belt Inspection
Regularly check the condition of your seat belts as follows:
•Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear.
•Check that the latches work smoothly and the belts retract easily.
uIf a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem. Only
use a mild soap and warm water. Do not use bleach or cleaning solvents. Make
sure the belt is completely dry before allowing it to retract.
Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide proper
protection and should be replaced as soon as possible.
A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of
protection in a subsequent crash. Have your seat belts inspected by a dealer after
any collision.
1Seat Belt Inspection
3
WARNING
Not checking or maintaining seat belts can
result in serious injury or death if the seat
belts do not work properly when needed.
Check your seat belts regularly and have
any problem corrected as soon as possible.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 32 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
33
Continued
Airbags
Airbag System Components
6
78 91011 12 8 10
8
8
8
8
13
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 33 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Safe Driving
TOC
34
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components
Safe Driving
The front, front side, and side curtain
airbags are deployed according to the
direction and severity of impact. The airbag
system includes:
aTwo SRS (Supplemental Restraint
System) front airbags. The driver’s airbag
is stored in the center of the steering
wheel; the front passenger’s airbag is
stored in the dashboard. Both are marked
SRS AIRBAG.
bTwo side airbags, one for the driver and
one for a front passenger. The airbags are
stored in the outer edges of the seat-
backs. Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.
cTwo side curtain airbags, one for each
side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored
in the ceiling, above the side windows.
The front and rear pillars are marked
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG.
dAn electronic control unit that continually
monitors and records information about
the sensors, the airbag activators, the
seat belt tensioners, and driver and front
passenger seat belt use when the ignition
switch is in ON (w.
eAutomatic front seat belt tensioners. The
driver’s and front passenger’s seat belts
incorporate sensors that detect whether
or not they are fastened.
fA driver’s seat position sensor. If the seat
is too far forward, the airbag will inflate
with less force.
gWeight sensors in the front passenger’s
seat. The front passenger’s airbag will be
turned off if the weight on the seat is 65
lbs (29 kg) or less (the weight of an infant
or small child).
hImpact sensors that can detect a
moderate-to-severe front or side collision.
iAn indicator on the dashboard that alerts
you that the front passenger’s front
airbag has been turned off.
jSensors that can detect if a child or small
statured adult is in the deployment path
of the front passenger’s side airbag.
kAn indicator on the instrument panel that
alerts you to a possible problem with your
airbag system or seat belt tensioners.
lAn indicator on the instrument panel that
alerts you that the front passenger’s side
airbag has been turned off.
mSafing Sensor
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 34 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
35
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components
Airbags can pose serious hazards. To do their job, airbags must inflate with
tremendous force. So, while airbags help save lives, they can cause burns, bruises,
and other minor injuries, and sometimes even fatal ones if occupants are not
wearing their seat belts properly and sitting correctly.
What you should do: Always wear your seat belt properly, and sit upright and
as far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the
vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard
as possible.
Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that
can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the
airbags deploy.
Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag.
Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp
object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates.
Do not attach or place objects on the front airbag covers. Objects on the
covers marked SRS AIRBAG could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags
or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
■Important Facts About Your Airbags
1Important Facts About Your Airbags
Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags. Together,
airbags and seat belts provide the best protection.
When driving, keep hands and arms out of the
deployment path of the front airbag by holding each
side of the steering wheel. Do not cross an arm over
the airbag cover.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 35 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Safe Driving
TOC
36
uuAirbagsuTypes of Airbags
Safe Driving
Types of Airbags
Your vehicle is equipped with three types of airbags:
•Front airbags: Airbags in front of the driver’s and front passenger’s seats.
•Side airbags: Airbags in the driver’s and front passenger’s seat-backs.
•Side curtain airbags: Airbags above the side windows.
Each is discussed in the following pages.
Front Airbags (SRS)
The front SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help protect
the head and chest of the driver and/or front passenger.
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to
supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupant’s primary
restraint system.
The front airbags are housed in the center of the steering wheel for the driver, and
in the dashboard for the front passenger. Both airbags are marked SRS AIRBAG.
■Housing Locations
1Types of Airbags
The airbags can inflate whenever the ignition switch
is in ON (w.
1Front Airbags (SRS)
Dual-Stage, Multiple-Threshold Front Airbags
(SRS)
Your vehicle is equipped with dual-stage, multiple-
threshold front airbags (SRS).
During a frontal crash severe enough to cause one or
both front airbags to deploy, the airbags can inflate
at different rates, depending on the severity of the
crash, whether or not the seat belts are latched, and/
or other factors. Frontal airbags are designed to
supplement the seat belts to help reduce the
likelihood of head and chest injuries in frontal
crashes.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 36 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
Continued 37
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
Front airbags are designed to inflate during moderate-to-severe frontal collisions.
When the vehicle decelerates suddenly, the sensors send information to the control
unit which signals one or both front airbags to inflate.
A frontal collision can be either head-on or angled between two vehicles, or when a
vehicle crashes into a stationary object, such as a concrete wall.
While your seat belt restrains your torso, the
front airbag provides supplemental protection
for your head and chest.
The front airbags deflate immediately so that
they won’t interfere with the driver’s visibility
or the ability to steer or operate other
controls.
The total time for inflation and deflation is so fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in front of them.
■Operation
■How the Front Airbags Work
1How the Front Airbags Work
After a front airbag inflates in a crash, you may see
what looks like smoke. This is actually powder from
the airbag’s surface. Although the powder is not
harmful, people with respiratory problems may
experience some temporary discomfort. If this occurs,
get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
Although the driver’s and front passenger’s airbags
normally inflate within a split second of each other, it
is possible for only one airbag to deploy. This can
happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin,
or threshold, that determines whether or not the
airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will
provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental
protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 37 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Safe Driving
TOC
38
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
Safe Driving
■When front airbags should not deploy
Minor frontal crashes: Front airbags were designed to supplement seat belts and
help save lives, not to prevent minor scrapes, or even broken bones that might occur
during a less than moderate-to-severe frontal crash.
Side impacts: Front airbags can provide protection when a sudden deceleration
causes a driver or front passenger to move towards the front of the vehicle. Side
airbags and side curtain airbags have been specifically designed to help reduce the
severity of injuries that can occur during a moderate-to-severe side impact which
can cause the driver or passenger to move towards the side of the vehicle.
Rear impacts: Head restraints and seat belts are your best protection during a rear
impact. Front airbags cannot provide any significant protection and are not designed
to deploy in such collisions.
Rollovers: Seat belts, and in vehicles equipped with a rollover sensor, side airbags,
and side curtain airbags offer the best protection in a rollover. Because front airbags
could provide little if any protection, they are not designed to deploy during a
rollover.
■When front airbags deploy with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the
vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy.
Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object
that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is
underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent.
■When front airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage
appears severe
Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of
visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some
collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags
would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they
had deployed.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 38 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
39
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
Your front airbags have advanced features to help reduce the likelihood of airbag
related injuries to smaller occupants.
The driver’s advanced front airbag system
includes a seat position sensor.
If the seat is too far forward, the airbag
inflates with less force, regardless of the
severity of the impact.
The passenger’s advanced front airbag system
has weight sensors.
Although Acura recommends against carrying
an infant or small child in front, if the sensors
detect the weight of a child (up to about 65
lbs or 29 kg), the system will automatically
turn off the passenger’s front airbag.
■Advanced Airbags
1Advanced Airbags
If there is a problem with the driver’s seat position
sensor, the SRS indicator will come on and the airbag
will inflate with full (normal) force, regardless of the
driver’s seating position.
For both advanced front airbags to work properly:
•Do not spill any liquid on or under the seats.
•Do not put any object under the passenger’s seat.
•Make sure any objects are positioned properly on
the floor. Improperly positioned objects can
interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
•All occupants should sit upright and wear their seat
belts properly.
•Do not place any cover over the passenger side
dashboard.
Driver’s
Seat
Position
Sensor
Passenger’s
Seat
Weight
Sensors
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 39 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Safe Driving
TOC
40
uuAirbagsuSide Airbags
Safe Driving
Side Airbags
The side airbags help protect the upper torso of the driver or a front passenger
during a moderate-to-severe side impact.
The side airbags are housed in the outside
edge of the driver’s and passenger’s seat-
backs.
Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.
When the sensors detect a moderate-to-
severe side impact, the control unit signals
the side airbag on the impact side to
immediately inflate.
■Housing Locations
1Side Airbags
Do not attach accessories on or near the side airbags.
They can interfere with the proper operation of the
airbags, or hurt someone if an airbag inflates.
If the impact is on the passenger side, the airbag
deploys even if there is no passenger in the passenger
seat.
Do not cover or replace the front seat-back covers
without consulting a dealer.
Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back
covers can prevent your side airbags from properly
deploying during a side impact.
Housing Location
■Operation
When
inflated
Side Airbag
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 40 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
41
uuAirbagsuSide Airbags
Continued
■When a side airbag deploys with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag systems senses sudden acceleration, a strong impact to the side
of the vehicle’s framework can cause a side airbag to deploy. In such cases, there
may be little or no damage, but the side impact sensors detected a severe enough
impact to deploy the airbag.
■When a side airbag may not deploy, even though visible
damage appears severe
It is possible for a side airbag to not deploy during an impact that results in
apparently severe damage. This can occur when the point of impact was towards
the far front or rear of the vehicle, or when the vehicle’s crushable body parts
absorbed most of the crash energy. In either case, the side airbag would not have
been needed nor provided protection even if it had deployed.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 41 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Safe Driving
TOC
uuAirbagsuSide Airbags
42
Safe Driving
To reduce the likelihood that a front passenger may be injured by an inflating side
airbag, the passenger side airbag is automatically turned off when:
•The height sensors detect a child or short-statured adult is seated in the front
passenger seat.
•The position sensor detects that the front passenger is leaning into the
deployment path of the side airbag.
When the side airbag cutoff system is activated, the side airbag off indicator
comes on.
2Side Airbag Off Indicator P. 46
If the side airbag off indicator comes on, have the passenger sit upright. A few
seconds after the passenger is sitting properly, the side airbag will automatically be
turned on, and the indicator will go off.
If the front passenger is a child, stop when it is safe to do so, and have the child sit
properly restrained in a rear seat.
■Side Airbag Cutoff System
■Side Airbag Off Indicator
1Side Airbag Cutoff System
The sensors that monitor the front passenger’s height
and body position may not work if:
•The seat-back is wet
•The passenger is touching a metal or other
electrical conductive object
•A seat cushion is on the seat
•The passenger is wearing excessively thick clothing
Sensors that
monitor the
passenger’s height.
Sensors that monitor the
passenger’s position.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 42 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
43
uuAirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags
Side Curtain Airbags
The side curtain airbags help protect the heads of the driver and passengers in outer
seating positions during a moderate-to-severe side impact.
The side curtain airbags are located in the
ceiling above the side windows on both sides
of the vehicle.
The side curtain airbag is designed to deploy
in a moderate-to-severe side impact.
■When side curtain airbags deploy in a frontal collision
One or both side curtain airbags may inflate in a moderate-to-severe angled
frontal collision.
In this case, the side curtain airbags will deploy slightly after the front airbags.
■Housing Locations
1Side Curtain Airbags
The side curtain airbags are most effective when an
occupant is wearing their seat belt properly and
sitting upright, well back in their seat.
Do not attach any objects to the side windows or roof
pillars as they can interfere with the proper operation
of the side curtain airbags.
Side Curtain Airbag Storage
■Operation
Deployed Side Curtain Airbag
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 43 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Safe Driving
TOC
44
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
Safe Driving
Airbag System Indicators
If a problem occurs in the airbag system, the SRS indicator will come on and a
message appears on the multi-information display.
■When the ignition switch is turned to
ON (w
The indicator comes on for a few seconds,
then goes off. This tells you the system is
working properly.
If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, have the
system checked by a dealer as soon as possible. If you don’t, your airbags and seat
belt tensioners may not work properly when they are needed.
■SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Indicator
1SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Indicator
3
WARNING
Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in
serious injury or death if the airbag systems
or tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as
soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts
you to a possible problem.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 44 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
Continued 45
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
■When the passenger airbag off
indicator comes on
The indicator comes on to alert you that the
passenger’s front airbag has been turned off.
This occurs when the weight sensors detect
65 lbs (29 kg) or less, the weight of an infant
or small child, on the seat.
Infants and small children should always ride properly restrained in a back seat.
2Child Safety P. 48
Objects placed on the seat can also cause the indicator to come on.
If the front passenger seat is empty, the passenger’s front airbag will not deploy and
the indicator will not come on.
■Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
1Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
If the indicator comes on with no front passenger and
no objects on the passenger’s seat, or with an adult
riding there, something may be interfering with the
weight sensors. Such as:
•An object hanging on the seat or in the seat-back
pocket.
•A child seat or other object pressing against the
rear of the seat-back.
•A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of
the front passenger’s seat.
•The front seat or seat-back is forced back against
an object on the seat or floor behind it.
•An object placed under the front passenger’s seat.
If none of these conditions exist, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and
goes off repeatedly if the total weight on the seat is
near the airbag cutoff threshold.
U.S. Canada
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 45 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Safe Driving
TOC
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
46
Safe Driving
■When the side airbag off indicator
comes on
This indicator comes on if the passenger’s side
airbag has been turned off because the
passenger is too small to be sitting in the front
seat, is slouching or not sitting upright, or has
leaned into the airbag’s deployment path.
Unless the passenger is a smaller statured
adult or a child, the indicator should go off
when the passenger returns to a proper
upright sitting position.
■Side Airbag Off Indicator
1Side Airbag Off Indicator
When you turn the ignition switch to ON (w, the
indicator should come on for a few seconds and then
go out. If it doesn’t come on, stays on, or comes on
while driving without a passenger in the front seat,
have the system checked by a dealer as soon as
possible.
U.S.
Canada
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 46 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
47
uuAirbagsuAirbag Care
Airbag Care
You do not need to, and should not, perform any maintenance on or replace any
airbag system components yourself. However, you should have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer in the following situations:
■When the airbags have deployed
If an airbag has inflated, the control unit and other related parts must be
replaced. Similarly, once an automatic seat belt tensioner has been activated, it
must be replaced.
■When the vehicle has been in a moderate-to-severe collision
Even if the airbags did not inflate, have your dealer inspect the following: the driver’s
seat position sensor, weight sensors in the passenger’s seat, front seat belt
tensioners, and each seat belt that was worn during the crash.
■Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting a dealer
This would likely disable the driver’s seat position sensor or the weight sensors in the
passenger’s seat. If it is necessary to remove or modify a front seat to accommodate
a person with disabilities, contact an Acura dealer, or for U.S. vehicles, Acura Client
Relations at 1-800-382-2238 and for Canadian vehicles, Canadian Acura Client
Service at 1-888-9-ACURA-9.
1Airbag Care
We recommend against the use of salvaged airbag
system components, including the airbag, tensioners,
sensors, and control unit.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 47 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Safe Driving
TOC
48
Safe Driving
Child Safety
Protecting Child Passengers
Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are
either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle accidents are the
number one cause of death of children age 12 and under.
To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state, Canadian province
and territory requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride
in a vehicle.
Children should sit properly restrained in a rear seat. This is because:
•An inflating front or side airbag can injure
or kill a child sitting in the front seat.
•A child in the front seat is more likely to
interfere with the driver’s ability to safely
control the vehicle.
•Statistics show that children of all sizes and
ages are safer when they are properly
restrained in a rear seat.
1Protecting Child Passengers
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport Canada recommend
that all children age 12 and under be properly
restrained in a rear seat. Some states or provinces/
territories have laws restricting where children may
ride.
3
WARNING
Children who are unrestrained or
improperly restrained can be seriously
injured or killed in a crash.
Any child too small for a seat belt should be
properly restrained in a child seat. A larger
child should be properly restrained with a
seat belt, using a booster seat if necessary.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 48 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
49
uuChild SafetyuProtecting Child Passengers
•Any child who is too small to wear a seat belt correctly must be restrained in an
approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle using either the lap belt
portion of the lap/shoulder belt or the lower anchors of the LATCH system.
•Never hold a child on your lap because it is impossible to protect them in the
event of a collision.
•Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash, the belt would
likely press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries.
•Never let two children use the same seat belt. Both children could be very
seriously injured in a crash.
•Do not allow children to operate the doors, windows or seat adjustments.
•Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended, especially in hot weather when
the inside of the vehicle can get hot enough to kill them. They could also activate
vehicle controls causing it to move unexpectedly.
1Protecting Child Passengers
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle
and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.
To remind you of the passenger’s front airbag
hazards and child safety, your vehicle has warning
labels on the dashboard (U.S. models) and on the
front visors. Please read and follow the instructions
on these labels.
2Safety Labels P. 61
3
WARNING
Allowing a child to play with a seat belt or
wrap one around their neck can result in
serious injury or death.
Instruct children not to play with any seat
belt and make sure any unused seat belt a
child can reach is buckled, fully retracted,
and locked.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 49 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Safe Driving
TOC
50
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
Safety of Infants and Small Children
An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing, reclining child seat until the
infant reaches the seat maker’s weight or height limit for the seat, and the infant is
at least one year old.
■Positioning a rear-facing child seat
Child seats must be placed and secured in a
rear seating position.
When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front
passenger from moving their seat all the way back, or from locking their seat-back
in the desired position.
It can also interfere with proper operation of the passenger’s advanced front
airbag system.
2Airbags P. 33
If this occurs, we recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front
passenger’s seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied.
Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat.
■Protecting Infants
1Protecting Infants
Rear-facing child seats should never be installed in a
forward facing position.
Always refer to the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions before installation.
3
WARNING
Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front
seat can result in serious injury or death
during a crash.
Always place a rear-facing child seat in the
rear seat, not the front.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 50 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
Continued 51
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
If a child is at least one year old and within the weight range indicated by the child
seat manufacturer, the child should be properly restrained in a firmly secured
forward-facing child seat.
■Forward-facing child seat placement
We strongly recommend placing a forward-
facing child seat in a rear seating position.
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can be hazardous, even with
advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passenger’s front airbag off. A
rear seat is the safest place for a child.
■Protecting Smaller Children
1Protecting Smaller Children
Educate yourself about the laws and regulations
regarding child seat use where you are driving, and
follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Many experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat
up to age two, if the child’s height and weight are
appropriate for a rear-facing seat.
3
WARNING
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat can result in serious injury or
death if the front airbag inflates.
If you must place a forward-facing child
seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, and properly restrain the
child.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 51 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Safe Driving
TOC
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
52
Safe Driving
Most child seats are LATCH-compatible (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren).
Some have a rigid-type connector, while others have a flexible-type connector. Both
are equally easy to use. Some existing and previously owned child seats can only be
installed using the seat belt. Whichever type you choose, follow the child seat
manufacturer’s use and care instructions as well as the instructions in this manual.
Proper installation is key to maximizing your child’s safety.
In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH compatible
child seat can be installed using the seat belt and a top tether for added security.
This is because all child seats are required to be designed so that they can be secured
with a lap belt or the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. In addition, the child seat
manufacturer may advise that a seat belt be used to attach a LATCH-compatible seat
once a child reaches a specified weight. Please read the child seat owner’s manual
for proper installation instructions.
■Important consideration when selecting a child seat
Make sure the child seat meets the following three requirements:
•The child seat is the correct type and size for the child.
•The child seat is the correct type for the seating position.
•The child seat is compliant with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
■Selecting a Child Seat
1Selecting a Child Seat
Installation of a LATCH-compatible child seat is
simple.
LATCH-compatible child seats have been developed
to simplify the installation process and reduce the
likelihood of injuries caused by incorrect installation.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 52 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
53
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Continued
A LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed in either of the two outer rear
seats. A child seat is attached to the lower anchors with either the rigid or flexible
type of connectors.
1. Locate the lower anchors under the marks.
2. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat then
attach the child seat to the lower anchors
according to the instructions that came
with the child seat.
uWhen installing the child seat, make sure
that the lower anchors are not
obstructed by the seat belt or any other
object.
■Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
Marks
Rigid Type
Lower Anchors
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 53 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Safe Driving
TOC
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
54
Safe Driving
3. Open the tether anchor cover behind the
head restraint.
4. Release the head restraint, then route the
tether strap between the head restraint
legs, and secure the tether strap hook onto
the anchor.
5. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat maker.
6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by
rocking it forward and back and side to
side; little movement should be felt.
7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child
can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor
is activated, and the belt is fully retracted
and locked.
Flexible Type
1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
For your child’s safety, when using a child seat
installed using the LATCH system, make sure that the
seat is properly secured to the vehicle. A child seat
that is not properly secured will not adequately
protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the
child or other vehicle occupants.
Tether Strap
Hook
Anchor
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 54 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
55
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Continued
1. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat.
2. Route the seat belt through the child seat
according to the seat maker's instructions,
and insert the latch plate into the buckle.
uInsert the latch plate fully until it clicks.
3. Slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all
the way out until it stops. This activates the
lockable retractor.
4. Let the seat belt completely wind up into
the retractor, then try to pull it out to make
sure the retractor is locked.
uIf you are able to pull the shoulder belt
out, the lockable retractor is not
activated. Pull the seat belt all the way
out, and repeat steps 2 – 4.
5. Grab the shoulder part of the seat belt near
the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack
from the lap part of the belt.
uWhen doing this, place your weight on
the child seat and push it into the vehicle
seat.
■Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 55 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Safe Driving
TOC
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
56
Safe Driving
6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by
rocking it forward and back and side to
side; little movement should be felt.
7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child
can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor
is activated, and the belt is fully retracted
and locked.
1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
A child seat that is not properly secured will not
adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause
injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle
and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 56 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
57
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
A tether anchorage point is provided
behind each rear seating position. A child
seat that is installed with a seat belt and
comes with a tether can use the tether for
additional security.
1. Locate the appropriate tether anchorage
point and lift the cover.
2. Raise the head restraint to its highest
position, then route the tether strap
through the head restraint legs. Make sure
the strap is not twisted.
3. Secure the tether strap hook onto
the anchor.
4. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat manufacturer.
■Adding Security with a Tether
1Adding Security with a Tether
Since a tether can provide additional security to the
lap/shoulder seat belt installation, we recommend
using a tether whenever one is available.
Tether Anchorage Points
Cover
Anchor
Outer Position Tether
Strap Hook
Anchor
Center Position Tether
Strap Hook
Anchor
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 57 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Safe Driving
TOC
58
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children
Safe Driving
Safety of Larger Children
The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind
of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who
must sit in front.
When a child is too big for a child seat, secure the child in a rear seat using the lap/
shoulder seat belt. Have the child sit upright and all the way back, then answer the
following questions.
■Checklist
•Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the edge of the seat?
•Does the shoulder belt cross between the
child’s neck and arm?
•Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s thighs?
•Will the child be able to stay seated like this
for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder
seat belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a
booster seat until the seat belt fits properly without a booster seat.
■Protecting Larger Children
■Checking Seat Belt Fit
1Safety of Larger Children
3
WARNING
Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in
front can result in serious injury or death if
the passenger’s front airbag inflates.
If a larger child must ride in front, move the
vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible,
have the child sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly, using a booster seat if
needed.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 58 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
59
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children
If a lap/shoulder seat belt cannot be used
properly, position the child in a booster seat in
a rear seating position. For the child’s safety,
check that the child meets the booster seat
manufacturer’s recommendations.
Your vehicle has a rear seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever
have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front:
•Make sure you read and fully understand the instructions and safety information
in this manual.
•Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible.
•Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat.
•Check that the seat belt is properly positioned so that the child is secure in
the seat.
■Monitoring child passengers
We strongly recommend that you keep an eye on child passengers. Even older,
more mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten their seat belts
and sit up properly.
■Booster Seats
1Booster Seats
When installing a booster seat, make sure to read the
instructions that came with it, and install the seat
accordingly.
There are high- and low-type booster seats. Choose a
booster seat that allows the child to wear the seat
belt correctly.
Some U.S. states and Canadian provinces, and
territories require children to use a booster seat until
they reach a given age or weight (e.g. 6 years or 60
lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the state or
province, or territory where you intend to drive.
■Protecting Larger Children - Final Checks
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 59 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Safe Driving
TOC
60
Safe Driving
Exhaust Gas Hazard
Carbon Monoxide Gas
The engine exhaust from this vehicle contains carbon monoxide, a colorless,
odorless, and highly toxic gas. As long as you properly maintain your vehicle, carbon
monoxide gas will not get into the interior.
■Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever
•The exhaust system is making an unusual noise.
•The exhaust system may have been damaged.
•The vehicle is raised for an oil change.
When you operate a vehicle with the trunk open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into
the interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the trunk open,
open all the windows and set the climate control system as shown below.
1. Select the fresh air mode.
2. Select the mode.
3. Set the fan speed to high.
4. Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting.
Adjust the climate control system in the same manner if you sit in your parked
vehicle with the engine running.
1Carbon Monoxide Gas
An enclosed area such as a garage can quickly fill up
with carbon monoxide gas.
Do not run the engine with the garage door closed.
Even when the garage door is open, drive out of the
garage immediately after starting the engine.
3
WARNING
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and
even kill you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that
expose you to carbon monoxide.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 60 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
61
Safety Labels
Label Locations
These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that can cause serious injury or death. Read these
labels carefully.
If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact a dealer
for a replacement.
Sun Visor
U.S. models Canadian models
Radiator Cap
Doorjambs
U.S. models
U.S. models only
Dashboard
Canadian
models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 61 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Safe Driving
TOC
62
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 62 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
63
Instrument Panel
This chapter describes the buttons, indicators, and gauges that are used while driving.
Indicators ............................................ 64
Multi-Information Display Warning and
Information Messages...................... 72
Gauges and Multi-Information Display
Gauges.............................................. 75
Multi-Information Display .................. 76
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 63 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
64
Instrument Panel
Indicators
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Parking Brake and
Brake System
Indicator
●Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w, then goes off.
●Comes on when the parking brake
is applied, and goes off when it is
released.
●Come on when the brake fluid
level is low.
●Comes on if there is a problem
with the brake system.
●The beeper sounds and the
indicator comes on if you drive
with the parking brake not fully
released.
●Comes on while driving - Make sure
the parking brake is released. Check the
brake fluid level.
2What to do when the indicator
comes on while driving P. 292
●Comes on along with the ABS
indicator - Have the vehicle checked by
a dealer.
2If the Brake System Indicator
Comes On P. 292
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
●Comes on when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (w, and goes
off when the engine starts.
●Comes on when the engine oil
pressure is low.
●Comes on while driving - Immediately
stop in a safe place.
2If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator
Comes On P. 290
Shift Position
Indicator*
●Indicates the current shift lever
position. 2Shifting P. 195 —
U.S.
Canada
U.S.
Canada
* Not available on all models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 64 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
65
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp
●Comes on when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (w, and goes
off either when the engine starts
or after several seconds if the
engine is not started. If “readiness
codes” have not been set, it blinks
five times before it goes off.
●Comes on if there is a problem
with the emissions control system.
●Blinks when a misfire in the
engine’s cylinders is detected.
●Readiness codes are part of the on board
diagnostics for the emissions control
systems.
2Testing of Readiness Codes P. 311
●Comes on while driving - Have the
vehicle checked by a dealer.
●Blinks while driving - Stop in a safe
place where there are no flammable
objects. Stop the engine for 10 minutes
or more, and wait for it to cool down.
Then, take the vehicle to a dealer.
2If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Comes On or Blinks P. 291
Charging System
Indicator
●Comes on when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (w, and goes
off when the engine starts.
●Comes on when the battery is not
charging.
●Comes on while driving - Turn off the
climate control system and rear defogger
in order to reduce electricity
consumption.
2If the Charging System Indicator
Comes On P. 290
Transmission
Indicator*
●Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w, then goes off.
●Blinks if the transmission system
has a problem.
●Blinks while driving - Avoid sudden
starts and acceleration and have the
vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
* Not available on all models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 65 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Instrument Panel
TOC
66
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
M (sequential shift
mode) Indicator/
Gear Position
Indicator*
●Comes on when the manual
sequential shift mode is applied.
●Blinks if the transmission system
has a problem.
2Sequential Shift Mode P. 197 —
Seat Belt
Reminder
Indicator
●Comes on and the beeper sounds
if you are not wearing a seat belt
when you turn the ignition switch
to ON (w.
●If the front passenger is not wearing
a seat belt, the indicator comes on
about a few seconds later.
●Blinks while driving if either you or
the front passenger has not
fastened a seat belt. The beeper
sounds and the indicator blinks at
regular intervals.
●The beeper stops and the indicator goes
off when you and the front passenger
fasten their seat belts.
●Stays on after you or the front
passenger has fastened the seat belt
- A detection error may have occurred in
the sensor. Have the vehicle checked by a
dealer.
2Seat Belt Reminder P. 27
Low Fuel
Indicator
●Comes on when the fuel reserve is
running low (approximately 2.8
U.S. gal./10.5 Liter left).
●Blinks if there is a problem with the
fuel gauge.
●Comes on - Refuel your vehicle as soon
as possible.
●Blinks - Have the vehicle checked by a
dealer.
ABS (Anti-lock
Brake System)
Indicator
●Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w, then goes off.
●If it comes on at any other time,
there is a problem with the ABS.
●Stays on constantly - Have the vehicle
checked by a dealer. With this indicator
on, your vehicle still has normal braking
ability but no anti-lock function.
2ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) P. 212
Indicator
* Not available on all models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 66 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
67
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Supplemental
Restraint System
Indicator
●Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w, then goes off.
●Comes on if a problem with any of
the following is detected:
-Supplemental restraint system
-Side airbag system
-Side curtain airbag system
-Seat belt tensioner
●Stays on constantly or does not come
on at all - Have the vehicle checked by a
dealer.
VSA® (Vehicle
Stability Assist)
System Indicator
●Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w, then goes off.
●Blinks when VSA® is active.
●Comes on if there is a problem
with the VSA® system.
●Stays on constantly - Have the vehicle
checked by a dealer.
2VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka
ESC (Electronic Stability Control),
System P. 204
VSA® (Vehicle
Stability Assist)
OFF Indicator
●Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w, then goes off.
●Comes on when you deactivate
VSA®.
2VSA® On and Off P. 205 —
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 67 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Instrument Panel
TOC
68
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Door and Trunk
Open Indicator
●Comes on for a few seconds if you
turn the ignition switch to ON (w,
then goes off.
●Comes on if the trunk or any door
is not completely closed.
●Goes off if a door or the trunk is closed.
EPS (Electric
Power Steering)
System Indicator
●Comes on when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (w, and goes
off when the engine starts.
●Comes on if there is a problem
with the EPS (Electric Power
Steering) System.
●Stays on constantly or does not come
on at all - Have the vehicle checked by a
dealer.
2If the EPS System Indicator Comes
On P. 292
Low Tire Pressure/
TPMS Indicator
●Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w.
●Comes on if the tire pressure of
any of the tires becomes
significantly low.
●Blinks for about one minute, and
then stays on if there is a problem
with the TPMS, or when a compact
spare tire is temporarily installed.
●Comes on while driving - Stop in a
safe place, check tire pressures, and
inflate the tire(s) if necessary.
●Blinks and remains on - Have the
vehicle checked by a dealer. If the vehicle
is fitted with a compact spare, get your
regular tire repaired or replaced and put
back on your vehicle as soon as you can.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 68 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
69
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
System Message
Indicator
●Comes on along with a beep when
a problem is detected. A system
message on the multi-information
display appears at the same time.
●While the indicator is on, press the
(information) button to see the
message again.
●Refer to the Indicators information in this
chapter when a system message appears
on the multi-information display. Take
the appropriate action for the message.
●The multi-information display does not
return to the normal screen unless the
warning is canceled, or the
button is pressed.
—
Turn Signal
Indicators
●The turn signal indicators blink
when you operate the turn signal
lever.
●If you press the hazard warning
button, both indicators and all turn
signals blink at the same time.
●Does not blink or blinks rapidly - A
turn signal light bulb has blown. Change
the bulb immediately.
2Replacing Light Bulbs P. 252
P. 253
—
High Beam
Indicator
●Comes on when the high beam
headlights are on.
●Comes on with reduced brightness
when DRL (daytime running lights)
are on.
——
Lights On
Indicator
●Comes on whenever the light
switch is on, or in AUTO when the
exterior lights are on.
●If you remove the key from the ignition
switch while the lights are on, a chime
sounds when the driver’s door is opened.
—
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 69 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Instrument Panel
TOC
70
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Fog Light Indicator
●Comes on when the fog lights are
on. ——
Side Airbag Off
Indicator
●Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w, then goes off.
●Comes on when the passenger
side airbag system is automatically
shut off.
●It does not mean there is a problem with
your side airbags.
●Comes on when nobody is sitting in
the passenger seat - Have the vehicle
checked by a dealer.
●Comes on when someone is sitting in
the seat - Have the passenger sit
properly.
Immobilizer
System Indicator
●Comes on briefly when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (w, then
goes off.
●Comes on if the immobilizer
system cannot recognize the key
information.
●Blinks - You cannot start the engine.
Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0, pull
the key out, and then insert the key and
turn it to ON (w again.
●Repeatedly blinks - The system may be
malfunctioning. Have the vehicle
checked by a dealer.
●Do not attempt to alter this system or
add other devices to it. Electrical
problems can occur.
—
U.S.
Canada
U.S.
Canada
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 70 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
71
uuIndicatorsu
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Security System
Alarm Indicator
●Blinks when the security system
alarm has been set. 2Security System Alarm P. 98 —
CRUISE MAIN
Indicator
●Comes on when you press the
CRUISE button. 2Cruise Control P. 201 —
CRUISE
CONTROL
Indicator
●Comes on if you have set a speed
for cruise control. 2Cruise Control P. 201 —
Indicator
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 71 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Instrument Panel
TOC
72
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
Instrument Panel
Multi-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
The following messages appear only on the multi-information display. Press the (information) button to see the message again
with the system message indicator on.
Message Condition Explanation
●Appears when the engine coolant temperature gets
abnormally high.
2Overheating P. 288
●Appears when the fuel fill cap is loose or is not
installed.
2Tighten Fuel Fill Cap Message P. 291
●Appears if there is a problem with the DRL system. ●Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
2Daytime Running Lights P. 107
● Appears when washer fluid gets low. ●Refill washer fluid.
2Refilling Window Washer Fluid P. 246
Canadian models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 72 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
73
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
Continued
Message Condition Explanation
●Appears when the scheduled maintenance is due
soon.
●Consequently, SERVICE DUE NOW and SERVICE
PAST DUE follow.
2Maintenance Minder Messages on the Multi-
Information Display P. 226
●Appears when you open the driver’s door while the
ignition key is in ACCESSORY (q.
●Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0, then remove the
key.
●Appears when the ignition key is turned to
ACCESSORY (q from ON (w. (The driver’s door is
closed.) —
●Appears when you open the driver’s door while the
ignition key is in LOCK (0.
●Remove the key from the ignition switch.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 73 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Instrument Panel
TOC
74
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●Appears when the starter system has a problem. ●As a temporary measure, hold the ignition switch to
START (e for up to 15 seconds and start the engine.
Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
6-cylinder models
U.S.
Canada
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 74 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
75
Gauges and Multi-Information Display
Gauges
Gauges include the speedometer, tachometer, fuel gauge, and temperature gauge.
They are displayed when the ignition switch is in ON (w.
Displays your driving speed in mph (U.S.) or km/h (Canada).
Displays the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank.
Displays the temperature of the engine coolant.
Shows the number of engine revolutions per minute.
■Speedometer
■Fuel Gauge
■Temperature Gauge
■Tachometer
1Fuel Gauge
NOTICE
You should refuel when the reading approaches .
Running out of fuel can cause the engine to misfire,
damaging the catalytic converter.
The actual amount of remaining fuel may differ from
the fuel gauge reading.
E
1Temperature Gauge
NOTICE
Driving with the temperature gauge pointer in the
upper zone can cause serious engine damage. Pull
safely to the side of the road and allow engine
temperature to return to normal.
2Overheating P. 288
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 75 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Instrument Panel
TOC
76
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
Instrument Panel
Multi-Information Display
The multi-information display shows the odometer, trip meter, outside temperature indicator, and other gauges.
It also displays important messages such as warnings and other helpful information.
Press the (information) button or the SEL/RESET button to change the display.
■Switching the Display
SEL/RESET Button Tire Pressure
for each tire
HFL*
Trip Computer
Trip BEngine Oil Life Trip A
Outside TemperatureOdometer
Button
: Press the SEL/RESET button.
: Press the button.
Shown when Bluetooth®
HandsFreeLink® is activated.
* Not available on all models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 76 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
Continued 77
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
Shows the total number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) that your vehicle has
accumulated.
Shows the total number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) driven since the last
reset. Meters A and B can be used to measure 2 separate trips.
■Resetting a trip meter
To reset a trip meter, display it, then press and hold the SEL/RESET button. The trip
meter is reset to 0.0.
■Odometer
■Trip Meter
1Trip Meter
Switch between trip meter A and trip meter B by
pressing the SEL/RESET button.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 77 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Instrument Panel
TOC
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
78
Instrument Panel
Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada).
■Adjusting the outside temperature display
Adjust the temperature reading up to ±5°F or ±3°C if the temperature reading
seems incorrect.
Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg or l/100 km.
Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg (U.S.) or l/100
km (Canada). The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the
average fuel economy is also reset.
Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the fuel remaining. This distance is
estimated from the fuel economy of your trips in the past.
■Outside Temperature
■Instant Fuel Economy
■Average Fuel Economy
■Range
1Outside Temperature
The temperature sensor is in the front bumper. Road
heat and exhaust from another vehicle can affect the
temperature reading when your vehicle speed is less
than 19 mph (30 km/h).
It may take several minutes for the display to be
updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.
Use the multi-information display’s customized
features to correct the temperature.
2Customized Features P. 80
1Average Fuel Economy
You can change whether to reset the average fuel
economy.
2Customized Features P. 80
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 78 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
Continued 79
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
The elapsed time display shows the time during one drive cycle.
The display shows the average speed in mph (U.S.) or km/h (Canada) since the last
time Trip A was reset.
Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance MinderTM.
2Maintenance MinderTM P. 225
Shows each tire’s pressure.
2TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) P. 206
Shows your paired cell phone’s information.
2Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 167
■Elapsed Time
■Average Speed
■Engine Oil Life
■Tire Pressure Monitor
■Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
1Elapsed Time
You can change when to reset the elapsed time.
2Customized Features P. 80
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 79 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Instrument Panel
TOC
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
80
Instrument Panel
Use the multi-information display to customize certain features.
■How to customize
Press and hold the button for a few seconds while the ignition switch
(w.
■Customized Features
1Customized Features
To customize other features, press the
button.
2List of customizable options P. 82
2Example for customization settings P. 84
Customization is possible when you see the driver’s
ID (DRIVER 1 or DRIVER 2) on the CHG setting
screen.
The driver’s ID indicates which remote transmitter
you have used to unlock the driver’s door.
The customized settings are recalled every time you
unlock the driver’s door with that remote.
When you customize settings:
Shift to (P
Set the parking brake
Automatic transmission models
Manual transmission models
Button:
Changes the customize
menus and items
Multi-Information
Display:
Goes to customize
settings.
SEL/RESET button:
Enters the selected
item
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 80 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
is in ON
81
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
Continued
■Customization flow
CHG SETTING
Press and hold the button.
DEFAULT ALL
EXIT
METER SETUP
POSITION SETUP
LIGHTING SETUP
DOOR SETUP
ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP. DISPLAY
LANGUAGE SELECTION
ELAPSED TIME RESET
TRIP A RESET with REFUEL
MEMORY POSITION LINK*
INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING TIME
AUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITY
HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER
AUTO DOOR LOCK
SECURITY RELOCK TIMER
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
DOOR LOCK MODE
KEYLESS LOCK ACKNOWLEDGMENT
SEL/RESET
Press and hold the button.
EXIT
SEL/RESET
SEL/RESET
SEL/RESET
SEL/RESET
SEL/RESET
* Not available on all models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 81 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Instrument Panel
TOC
82
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
Instrument Panel
■List of customizable options
*1: Default Setting
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable settings
METER
SETUP
LANGUAGE SELECTION Changes the displayed language. ENGLISH*1/FRENCH/SPANISH
ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.
DISPLAY Adjusts the temperature reading by a few degrees.
-5°F ~ ±0°F*1 ~ +5°F (U.S.)
-3°C ~ ±0°C*1 ~ +3°C (Canada)
TRIP A RESET with
REFUEL
Sets Trip A and the average fuel economy to reset
when you refuel. ON/OFF*1
ELAPSED TIME RESET Changes the resetting conditions of the elapsed
time. IGN OFF*1/TRIP A/TRIP B
POSITION
SETUP
MEMORY POSITION
LINK*
Changes the driver’s seat position to a stored
setting. ON*1/OFF
LIGHTING
SETUP
INTERIOR LIGHT
DIMMING TIME
Changes the length of time the interior lights stay
on after you close the doors. 60sec/30sec*1/15sec
HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF
TIMER
Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay
on after you close the driver’s door. 60sec/30sec/15sec*1/0sec
AUTO LIGHT
SENSITIVITY Changes the timing for the headlights to come on. MAX/HIGH/MID*1/LOW/MIN
* Not available on all models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 82 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
83
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
Continued
*1: Default Setting
*2: Default Setting for automatic transmission
*3: Default Setting for manual transmission
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable settings
DOOR
SETUP
AUTO DOOR LOCK Changes the setting for the automatic locking
feature.
OFF/ WITH VEH SPD*1/SHIFT
FROM P (A/T only)
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK Changes the setting for when the doors unlock
automatically.
OFF/DRIVER DOOR With
SHIFT to P*2 (A/T only)/ALL
DOORS With SHIFT to P (A/T
only)/DRIVER DOOR With IGN
OFF*3/ALL DOORS With IGN
OFF
DOOR LOCK MODE Sets up either the driver’s door or all doors to unlock
on the first push of the remote. DRIVER DOOR*1/ALL DOORS
KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
LOCK/UNLOCK - The exterior lights flash LOCK (2nd
push) - The beeper sounds ON*1/OFF
SECURITY RELOCK
TIMER
Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock and
the security system to set after you unlock the
vehicle without opening any door.
90sec/60sec/30sec*1
DEFAULT ALL Sets/Cancels all the customized settings as default. SET/CANCEL
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 83 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Instrument Panel
TOC
84
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
Instrument Panel
■Example for customization settings
The steps for changing the TRIP A RESET with REFUEL setting to ON are shown
below. The default setting for TRIP A RESET with REFUEL is OFF.
1. Press and hold the button until
CHG SETTING appears on the display.
2. Press the SEL/RESET button to go into the
METER SETUP group.
3. Press the SEL/RESET button again.
uLANGUAGE SELECTION appears first in
the display.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 84 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
85
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
4. Press the button until TRIP A
RESET with REFUEL appears on the
display, then press the SEL/RESET button.
uThe display switches to the
Customization setup screen, where you
can select ON, OFF, or EXIT.
5. Press the button and select ON,
then press the SEL/RESET button.
uThe ON setup screen appears, then the
display returns to the Customization
menu screen.
6. Press the button until EXIT
appears in the display, then press the SEL/
RESET button.
7. Repeat step 6 until you return to the normal
screen.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 85 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Instrument Panel
TOC
86
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 86 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
87
Controls
This chapter explains how to operate the various controls necessary for driving.
Setting the Clock ................................ 88
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Key Types and Functions .................... 89
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Outside ............................................ 91
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Inside ............................................... 93
Childproof Door Locks ....................... 94
Auto Door Lock/Unlock...................... 94
Opening and Closing the Trunk......... 95
Security System .................................. 98
Immobilizer System ............................ 98
Security System Alarm........................ 98
Opening and Closing the Windows ...100
Opening and Closing the Moonroof.. 103
Operating the Switches Around the
Steering Wheel
Ignition Switch................................. 104
Turn Signals..................................... 105
Light Switches.................................. 105
Fog Lights........................................ 107
Daytime Running Lights ................... 107
Wipers and Washers ........................ 108
Brightness Control ........................... 109
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
Button........................................ 110
Driving Position Memory System*.... 111
Adjusting the Steering Wheel........... 113
Adjusting the Mirror ........................ 114
Interior Rearview Mirror ................... 114
Power Door Mirrors ......................... 114
Adjusting the Seats .......................... 116
Adjusting the Seat Positions............. 116
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience
Items ................................................ 125
Interior Lights .................................. 125
Interior Convenience Items .............. 126
Climate Control System ................... 133
Using Automatic Climate Control .... 133
Automatic Climate Control Sensors... 136
* Not available on all models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 87 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
88
Controls
Setting the Clock
Clock
You can adjust the time in the clock display, using the CLOCK button.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select CLOCK ADJUST in
3. Press . CLOCK ADJUST appears.
4. Rotate to select the item you want to
adjust (12/24 hour mode, hour, minute).
Then press .
5. Rotate to make the adjustment.
6. Press to enter your selection. The display
returns to CLOCK ADJUST. Repeat steps 4
to 6 to adjust other items.
7. To enter the selection, Rotate and select
SET, then press .
8. Press the MENU button to go back to the
normal display.
■Adjusting the Time
1Clock
You can switch the clock display between 24 hours
and 12 hours when in the menu mode.
Selector Knob Icon details
Rotate to select.
Press to enter.
To set the time to the nearest hour:
Press and hold the CLOCK button until the clock
display begins to blink, then press the (3 (Reset)
button.
Depending on the displayed time, the clock sets
forward or backward.
Example:
1:06 will reset to 1:00
1:53 will reset to 2:00
The clock is automatically updated through the
navigation system, so the time does not need to be
adjusted.
Models with navigation system
Models without navigation system
Menu Button
12/24 Hour Mode
Hour Setting
Minute Setting
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 88 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
the display.
89
Continued
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Key Types and Functions
This vehicle comes with the following keys:
Use the keys to start and stop the engine, and
to lock and unlock all the doors, trunk, and
fuel fill door. You can also use the remote
transmitter to lock and unlock the doors,
trunk, and fuel fill door.
The seat automatically moves to the preset
position when you unlock the door using the
remote transmitter on the master key.
2Driving Position Memory System* P. 111
The master key folds up inside the remote
transmitter.
1. Press the release button to release the key
out from the transmitter.
uMake sure to fully extend the key.
2. To close the key, press the release button
then push the key inside the transmitter
until you hear a click.
■Retractable Master Keys
1Key Types and Functions
All the keys have an immobilizer system. The
immobilizer system helps to protect against vehicle
theft.
2Immobilizer System P. 98
The keys contain precision electronics.
Adhere to the following advice to prevent damage to
the electronics:
•Do not leave the keys in direct sunlight, or in
locations with high temperature or high humidity.
•Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them.
•Keep the keys away from liquids.
•Do not take the keys apart except for replacing the
battery.
If the circuits in the keys are damaged, the engine
may not start, and the remote transmitter may not
work.
If the keys do not work properly, have them
inspected by a dealer.
If the key is not fully extended, the immobilizer
system may not work properly, and the engine may
not start.
Avoid contact with the key whenever it extends or
retracts.
Panic Button Trunk Button
Lock
Button
Release Button
Unlock
Button
Models with a driving position system
Release Button
Press
* Not available on all models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 89 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Controls
TOC
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuKey Types and Functions
90
Controls
Can be used to start and stop the engine, and
lock and unlock driver’s door.
Contains a number that you will need if you
purchase a replacement key.
■Valet Key
1Valet Key
When you need to leave a key with a third party,
leave the valet key.
■Key Number Tag
1Key Number Tag
Keep the key number tag separate from the key in a
safe place outside of your vehicle.
If you wish to purchase an additional key, contact a
dealer.
If you lose your key and you cannot start the engine,
contact a dealer.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 90 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
91
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Continued
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
■Locking the doors
Press the lock button.
Once:
uSome exterior lights flash, all the doors,
trunk, and fuel fill door lock, and the
security system sets.
Twice (within five seconds after the first
push):
uA beeper sounds and verifies the security
system is set.
■Unlocking the doors
Press the unlock button.
Once:
uSome exterior lights flash twice, and the
driver’s door and fuel fill door unlocks.
Twice:
uThe remaining doors and the
■Using the Remote Transmitter
1Using the Remote Transmitter
Open the door within 30 seconds.
If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of
unlocking the vehicle with the remote transmitter,
the doors will automatically relock.
If the interior light switch is in the door activated
position, the interior lights come on when you press
the unlock button.
No doors opened: The lights fade out after 30
seconds.
Doors relocked with the remote: The lights go off
immediately.
2Interior Lights P. 125
The remote transmitter uses low-power signals, so
the operating range may vary depending on the
surroundings.
The remote transmitter will not work when the key is
in the ignition switch. The remote will not lock the
vehicle when a door is open.
If the distance at which it works varies, the battery is
probably low.
If the LED does not come on when you press a
button, the battery is dead.
2Replacing the Battery P. 269
LED
Lock
Button
Unlock
Button
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 91 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Controls
TOC
trunk unlock.
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
92
Controls
Fully insert the key and turn it.
If you are using the master key, make sure it is
fully extended.
■Locking the driver’s door
Pull the lock tab rearward a or push the
master door lock switch in the lock direction
b, and close the door.
■Locking the passenger’s doors
Pull the lock tab rearward and close the door.
■Lockout prevention system
The doors cannot be locked when the key is in the ignition switch, and any
door is open.
■Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
1Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
When you lock the driver’s door with a key, all the
other doors, trunk, and fuel fill door lock at the same
time. When unlocking, the driver’s door and fuel fill
door unlock first. Turn the key a second time within a
few seconds to unlock the remaining doors and the
trunk.
Lock Unlock
■Locking a Door Without Using a Key
1Locking a Door Without Using a Key
When you lock the driver’s door, all the other doors,
trunk, and fuel fill door lock at the same time.
Make sure you have the key in your hand before
locking the door to prevent it from being locked in
the vehicle.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 92 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
93
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
■Locking a door
Pull the lock tab rearward.
■Unlocking a door
Push the lock tab forward.
Press the master door lock switch in as shown
to lock or unlock all doors.
■Using the Lock Tab
1Using the Lock Tab
When you lock the door using the lock tab on the
driver’s door, all the other doors, trunk, and fuel fill
door lock at the same time.
When you unlock the door using the lock tab on the
driver’s door, only the driver’s door will unlock.
To Unlock
Lock Tab
To Lock
■Using the Master Door Lock Switch
1Using the Master Door Lock Switch
When you lock/unlock the driver’s door using the
master lock switch, all the other doors, trunk, and
fuel fill door lock/unlock at the same time.
Master Door
Lock Switch
To Unlock
To Lock
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 93 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Controls
TOC
94
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuChildproof Door Locks
Controls
Childproof Door Locks
The childproof door locks prevent the rear doors from being opened from the inside
regardless of the position of the lock tab.
Slide the lever in the rear door to the lock
position, and close the door.
■When opening the door
Open the door using the outside door handle.
Auto Door Lock/Unlock
■Auto door lock
The auto door lock function automatically locks all the doors when the vehicle
reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).
■Auto door unlock
When you depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever to (P, the driver’s door
automatically unlocks.
When you depress the brake pedal and turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0, the
driver’s door automatically unlocks.
■Setting the Childproof Door Locks
1Childproof Door Locks
To open the door from the inside when the
childproof door lock is on, put the lock tab in the
unlock position, lower the rear window, put your
hand out of the window, and pull the outside door
handle.
Lock
Unlock
1Auto Door Lock/Unlock
The auto door lock/unlock settings can be
customized using the multi-information display.
2Customized Features P. 80
Automatic transmission models
Manual transmission models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 94 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
95
Opening and Closing the Trunk
Precautions for Opening/Closing the Trunk
■Opening the trunk
Open the trunk all the way.
uIf it is not fully opened, the trunk lid may begin to close under its own weight.
■Closing the trunk
Keep the trunk lid closed while driving to:
uAvoid possible damage.
uPrevent exhaust gas from leaking into the vehicle.
2Carbon Monoxide Gas P. 60
Using the Trunk Opener
Pressing the trunk release to the lower left of
the driver's seat unlocks and opens the trunk.
Trunk Release
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 95 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Controls
TOC
96
uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuUsing the Remote Transmitter
Controls
Using the Remote Transmitter
Press the trunk release button for
approximately one second to unlock and open
the trunk.
Using the Trunk Release Switch
Push up the release switch on the trunk lid
after the doors are unlocked.
1Using the Remote Transmitter
When the driver’s door is locked:
The trunk will lock when it is closed.
When the driver’s door is unlocked:
The trunk will not lock when it is closed.
When the ignition switch is in any position except
LOCK (0, you cannot open the trunk using the trunk
release button on the remote transmitter.
Trunk
Button
Release Switch
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 96 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
97
uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuTrunk Main Switch
Trunk Main Switch
The trunk main switch disables the trunk
opener on the driver’s side and the trunk
release button on the trunk lid to protect
luggage in the trunk.
1. Make sure the rear seat-backs are not
folded down.
2. Turn off the trunk main switch in the
3. Lock the glove box.
Emergency Trunk Opener
The trunk release lever allows you to open the
trunk from inside for your safety.
Slide the release lever in the direction of
the arrow.
1Trunk Main Switch
If you need to give the key to someone else, give
them the valet key.
The trunk release button on the remote transmitter is
always enabled, even when the trunk main switch is
off.
Main Switch
ON
OFF
1Emergency Trunk Opener
Parents should decide if their children should be
shown how to use this feature.
Lever
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 97 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Controls
TOC glove box.
98
Controls
Security System
Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system prevents a key that has not been pre-registered from
starting the engine. Each key contains electronic transmitters that use electronic
signals to verify the key.
Pay attention to the following when inserting the key into the ignition switch.
•Do not allow objects that emit strong radio waves near the ignition switch.
•Make sure the key is not covered by or touching a metal object.
•Do not bring a key from another vehicle’s immobilizer system near the n
Security System Alarm
The security system alarm activates when the doors, trunk, or hood are opened
without the key, or remote transmitter. It also activates if you turn the ignition
switch to ON (w after locking the doors with the remote transmitter.
■When the security system alarm activates
The horn sounds intermittently, and all the exterior lights flash.
■To deactivate the security system alarm
Unlock the vehicle using the key, or remote transmitter. The system, along with the
horn and flashing lights, are deactivated.
1Immobilizer System
NOTICE
Leaving the ignition key in the vehicle can result in
theft or accidental movement of the vehicle.
Always take the ignition key with you whenever you
leave the vehicle unattended.
Do not alter the system or add other devices to it.
Doing so may damage the system and make your
vehicle inoperable.
1Security System Alarm
The security alarm continues for a maximum of two
minutes until the security system deactivates.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 98 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
ignition switch.
99
uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm
■Setting the security system alarm
The security system alarm automatically sets when the following conditions have
been met:
•The ignition switch is in LOCK (0, and the key has been removed from the
ignition switch.
•The hood and trunk are closed.
•All doors are locked with the remote transmitter.
■When the security system alarm sets
The security system alarm indicator in the instrument panel blinks. When the
blinking interval changes after about 15 seconds, the security system alarm is set.
■To cancel the security system alarm
The security system alarm is canceled when the vehicle is unlocked using the key or
remote transmitter. The security system alarm indicator goes off at the same time.
■The PANIC button on the remote
transmitter
If you press the PANIC button for
approximately one second, the following will
occur:
•The horn sounds.
•Some exterior lights flash for about 30
seconds.
■Canceling panic mode
Press any button on the remote transmitter, or turn the ignition switch to ON (w.
■Panic Mode
1Security System Alarm
Do not set the security system alarm when someone
is in the vehicle or a window is open. The system can
accidentally activate when:
•Unlocking the door with the lock tab or the master
door lock switch.
•Opening the trunk with the release button on the
driver’s door or the emergency trunk opener.
If the battery goes dead after you have set the
security system alarm, the security alarm may go off
once the battery is recharged or replaced.
If this occurs, deactivate the security system alarm by
unlocking a door using the key or remote transmitter.
Do not attempt to alter this system or add another
device to it.
PANIC
Button
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 99 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Controls
TOC
100
Controls
Opening and Closing the Windows
Opening/Closing the Power Windows
The power windows can be opened and closed when the ignition switch is in ON
(w, using the switches on the doors. The driver’s side switches can be used to open
and close all the windows.
The power window lock button on the driver’s side must be switched off (not
pushed in, indicator off) to open and close the windows from anywhere other than
the driver’s seat.
When the power window lock button is turned on (pushed in, indicator on), you can
only operate the driver’s window. Turn the power window lock button on when
children are in the vehicle.
■Automatic operation
To open: Push the switch down firmly.
To close: Pull the switch up firmly.
The window opens or closes completely. To
stop the window at any time, push or pull the
switch briefly.
■Manual operation
To open: Push the switch down lightly.
To close: Pull the switch up lightly.
Release the switch when the window reaches
the desired position.
■Opening/Closing Windows with Auto-Open/Close Function
1Opening/Closing the Power Windows
The power windows can be operated for up to 10
minutes after you turn the ignition switch off.
Opening either front door cancels this function.
Auto Reverse
If a power window senses resistance when closing
automatically, it will stop closing and reverse
direction.
The driver’s window auto reverse function is disabled
when you continuously pull up the switch.
The auto reverse function stops sensing when the
window is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes.
3
WARNING
Closing a power window on someone’s
hands or fingers can cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are away from
the windows before closing them.
On
Off
Indicator
Driver’s
Window
Switch
Front Passenger’s Window Switch
Power Window
Lock Button
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 100 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
101
uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows
Continued
To open: Push the switch down.
To close: Pull the switch up.
Release the switch when the window reaches
the desired position.
To open: Press the unlock button twice
within 10 seconds and hold it down for the
second time. If the windows stop midway,
repeat the procedure.
■Opening/Closing Windows without
Auto-Open/Close Function
Close
Open
■Opening Windows and Moonroof
with the Remote Transmitter
Unlock
Button
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 101 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Controls
TOC
102
uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows
Controls
To open: Unlock the driver’s door with the
key. Within 10 seconds of returning the key to
the central position, turn the key in the unlock
direction and hold it there.
To close: Lock the driver’s door with the key.
Within 10 seconds of returning the key to the
central position, turn the key in the lock
direction and hold it there.
Release the key to stop the windows/
moonroof at the desired position. If you
want further adjustment, repeat the
same operation.
■Opening/Closing the Windows/Moonroof with the Key
Close Open
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 102 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
103
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
You can only operate the moonroof when the ignition switch is in ON (w. Use the
switch in the front of the ceiling to open and close the moonroof.
■Automatic operation
To open: Pull the switch back firmly,
then release.
To close: Push the switch forward firmly,
then release.
The moonroof will automatically open or close
all the way. To stop the moonroof midway,
touch the switch briefly.
■Manual operation
To open: Pull the switch back, and hold it
until the desired position is reached.
To close: Push the switch forward, and hold it
until the desired position is reached.
■Tilting the moonroof up
To tilt: Push on the center of the
moonroof switch.
To close: Push the switch forward firmly,
then release.
■Opening/Closing the Moonroof
1Opening/Closing the Moonroof
NOTICE
Opening the moonroof in below freezing
temperature or when it is covered with snow or ice
can damage the moonroof panel or motor.
The power moonroof can be operated for up to 10
minutes after you turn the ignition switch off.
Opening either front door cancels this function.
When resistance is detected, the auto reverse
function causes the moonroof to change directions,
then stop. Auto reverse stops sensing when the
moonroof is almost closed to ensure that it fully
closes. Make sure that all objects, including fingers,
are clear of the moonroof.
3
WARNING
Opening or closing the moonroof on
someone’s hands or fingers can cause
serious injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of
the moonroof before opening or closing it.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 103 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Controls
TOC
104
Controls
Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel
Ignition Switch
1Ignition Switch
You cannot take the key out unless the shift lever is
in (P.
If you open the driver’s door when the key is in LOCK
(0 or ACCESSORY (q, a warning buzzer will sound
to remind you to take the key out.
When this happens, the following messages appear
on the multi-information display:
•In LOCK (0: REMOVE KEY.
•In ACCESSORY (q: REMOVE KEY. The buzzer will
stop when you take the key out.
If the key won’t turn from LOCK (0 to ACCESSORY
(q, turn the key while moving the steering wheel left
and right. The steering wheel will unlock, allowing
the key to turn.
3
WARNING
Removing the key from the ignition switch
while driving locks the steering. This can
cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
Remove the key from the ignition switch
only when parked.
Manual transmission models
Automatic transmission models
All models
(0 LOCK: Insert and remove the key in this
position.
(q ACCESSORY: Operate the audio system and
other accessories in this position.
(w ON: This is the position when driving.
(e START: This position is for starting the engine.
The switch returns to ON (w when you let go of
the key.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 104 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
105
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluTurn Signals
Continued
Turn Signals
The turn signals can be used when the ignition
switch is in ON (w.
Light Switches
Rotating the light switch turns the lights on
and off, regardless of the position of the
ignition switch.
■High beams
Push the lever forward until you hear a click.
■Low beams
When in high beams, pull the lever back to
return to low beams.
■Flashing the high beams
Pull the lever back, and release it.
Right Turn
Left Turn
■Manual Operation
1Light Switches
If you remove the key from the ignition switch while
the light is on, a chime sounds when the driver’s door
is opened.
Repeatedly turning the headlights on and off reduces
the life of the HID headlight bulbs.
If you sense that the level of the headlights is
abnormal, have the vehicle inspected by a dealer.
Do not leave the lights on when the engine is off
because it will cause the battery to discharge.
High Beams
Flashing the high beams
Low Beams
Turns on parking, side marker,
tail and license plate lights
Turns on headlights, parking, side
marker, tail, and license plate
lights
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 105 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Controls
TOC
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches
106
Controls
Automatic lighting control can be used when
the ignition switch is in ON (w.
When you turn the light switch to AUTO, the
headlights and other exterior lights will switch
on and off automatically depending on the
ambient brightness.
uYou can change the auto light
sensitivity setting.
2Customized Features P. 80
■Automatic lighting off feature
The headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights turn off
within 15 seconds after you remove the key and close the driver’s door.
uYou can change the headlight auto off timer setting.
2Customized Features P. 80
If you turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 with the headlight switch on, but do not
open the door, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (3 minutes, if the switch is in the
AUTO position).
The lights turn on again when you unlock or open the driver’s door. If you unlock
the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights go off. If you open the
driver’s door, you will hear a lights on reminder chime.
■Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control)
1Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control)
We recommend that you turn on the lights manually
when driving at night, in a dense fog, or in dark areas
such as long tunnels or parking facilities.
The light sensor is in the location shown below.
Do not cover this light sensor with anything;
otherwise, the automatic lighting system may not
work properly.
Adjust the auto light sensitivity as follows:
Setting The exterior lights come on
when the ambient light is at
MAX
HIGH
MID
LOW
MIN
Light Sensor
Bright
Dark
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 106 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
107
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluFog Lights
Fog Lights
When the low beam headlights are on, turn
the fog light switch on to use the fog lights.
Daytime Running Lights
The high beam headlights come on slightly dimmer than normal when the following
conditions have been met:
•The ignition switch is in ON (w.
•The headlight switch is off, or in .
•The parking brake is released.
The lights remain on even if you set the parking brake. Turning off the ignition
switch will turn off the daytime running lights.
The high beam headlights return to the original brightness once the headlight
switch is turned on.
1Fog Lights
When the fog lights are on, the indicator in the
instrument panel will be on.
2Indicators P. 64
Fog Light Switch
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 107 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Controls
TOC
108
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers
Controls
Wipers and Washers
The windshield wipers and washers can be
used when the ignition switch is in ON (w.
■MIST
The wipers run at high speed until you release
the lever.
■Wiper switch (OFF, INT, LO, HI)
Change the wiper switch setting according to
the amount of rain.
■Adjusting the delay
Turn the adjustment ring to adjust the
wiper delay.
■Washer
Sprays while you pull the lever toward you.
When you release the lever, the wipers make
two or three more sweeps before stopping.
■Front Wiper/Washer
1Wipers and Washers
NOTICE
Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dry.
The windshield will get scratched, or the rubber
blades will get damaged.
NOTICE
In cold weather, the blades may freeze to the
windshield, becoming stuck.
Operating the wipers in this condition may damage
the wipers. Use the defroster to warm the
windshield, then turn the wipers on.
If the vehicle speeds up while the wipers are
operating intermittently, the length of the wipe
interval shortens. When the vehicle starts moving, the
wipers make a single sweep.
The wiper operation of the shortest delay setting ( )
and the LO setting become the same when the
vehicle speeds up.
Turn the washers off if no washer fluid comes out.
The pump may get damaged.
Intermittent Time
Adjustment Ring
Pull to
use
washer.
MIST
INT: Low speed with
intermittent
OFF
LO: Low speed wipe
HI: High speed wipe
Long delay
Short delay
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 108 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
109
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel uBrightness Control
Brightness Control
When the parking lights are turned on and the
ignition switch is in ON (w, you can use the
brightness control knob to adjust instrument
panel brightness.
Brighten: Turn the knob to the right.
Dim: Turn the knob to the left.
You will hear a beep when the brightness
reaches minimum or maximum. The multi-
information display will return to its
original state several seconds after you
adjust the brightness.
■Brightness level indicator
The brightness level is shown on the multi-
information display while you are adjusting it.
As the brightness level increases to the right,
the instrument panel gets brighter.
1Brightness Control
Instrument panel brightness varies, depending on
whether the exterior lights are on or off. The
instrument panel dims to reduce glare when they are
on.
Pressing either (information) button
switches the display.
If you turn the knob to the right until the brightness
display is up to max, the beeper sounds. This cancels
the reduced instrument panel brightness when the
exterior lights are on.
The brightness can be set differently for when the
exterior lights are on, and when they are off.
Control Knob
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 109 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Controls
TOC
110
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluRear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button
Controls
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button
Press the rear defogger and heated door
mirror button to defog the rear window and
mirrors when the ignition is in ON (w.
The rear defogger and heated door mirrors
automatically switch off after 10-30 minutes
depending on the outside temperature.
However, if the outside temperature is 32°F
(0°C) or below, they do not automatically
switch off.
1Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button
NOTICE
When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be
careful not to damage the heating wires.
It is critical to wipe the window from side to side
along the defogger heating wires.
This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off
when the window has been defogged.
Also, do not use the system for a long period when
the engine is idling. This may weaken the battery,
making it difficult to start the engine.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 110 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
111
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System*
Continued
Driving Position Memory System*
You can store two driver’s seat positions with the driving position memory system.
When you unlock and open the driver’s door with a remote transmitter, the seat
adjusts automatically to one of the two preset positions.
The multi-information display shows you which remote transmitter you used to
unlock the vehicle when you enter.
•Driver 1 transmitter is linked to memory button 1.
•Driver 2 transmitter is linked to memory button 2.
1Driving Position Memory System*
Using the multi-information display, you can disable
the automatic seat adjustment function.
2Customized Features P. 80
You can cancel the driving position memory link and
customized settings. Press and hold the lock and
unlock buttons at the same time. The LED in the
remote transmitter blinks twice and the default
settings are restored.
To turn the memory position link settings back on,
repeat this procedure. The LED will blink once.
Driver 1 Driver 2
* Not available on all models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 111 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Controls
TOC
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System*
112
Controls
1. Adjust the driver’s seat to the desired
position, and turn the ignition switch to
ON
(w.
2. Press the SET button.
uYou will hear the beeper, and the
memory button indicator light will blink.
3. Press memory button (1 or (2 within five
seconds of pressing the SET button.
uOnce the seat position has been
memorized, the indicator light on the
button you pressed stays on.
1. Move the shift lever to (P.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Press a memory button ((1 or (2).
uYou will hear the beeper, and the
indicator light will blink.
The seat will automatically move to the
memorized position. When it has finished
moving, you will hear the beeper, and the
indicator light stays on.
■Storing a Position in Memory
1Storing a Position in Memory
After you press the SET button, the storing operation
will be canceled when:
•You do not press the memory button within five
seconds.
•You readjust the seat position before the double-
beep.
•You turn the ignition switch to any position except
ON (w.
Memory Button 1
Memory Button 2
Set Button
■Recalling the Stored Position
1Recalling the Stored Position
The seat will stop moving if you:
•Press the SET button, or a memory button ((1 or
(2).
•Adjust the seat position.
•Shift into any position except (P.
•Release the parking brake.
Automatic transmission models
Manual transmission models
Memory Buttons
Automatic transmission models
All models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 112 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
113
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAdjusting the Steering Wheel
Adjusting the Steering Wheel
The steering wheel height and distance from your body can be adjusted so that you
can comfortably grip the steering wheel in an appropriate driving posture.
1. Pull the steering wheel adjustment lever up.
uThe steering wheel adjustment lever is
under the steering column.
2. Move the steering wheel up or down, and
in or out.
uMake sure you can see the instrument
panel gauges and indicators.
3. Push the steering wheel adjustment lever
down to lock the steering wheel in position.
uAfter adjusting the position, make sure
you have securely locked the steering
wheel in place by trying to move it up,
down, in, and out.
1Adjusting the Steering Wheel
Make any steering wheel adjustments before you
start driving.
3
WARNING
Adjusting the steering wheel position while
driving may cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only when the
vehicle is stopped.
To adjust
To lock Lever
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 113 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Controls
TOC
114
Controls
Adjusting the Mirror
Interior Rearview Mirror
Adjust the angle of the rearview mirror when you are sitting in the correct
driving position.
When driving after dark, the automatic
dimming rearview mirror reduces the glare
from headlights behind you. Press the auto
button to turn this function on and off.
When activated, the auto indicator comes on.
Power Door Mirrors
You can adjust the door mirrors when the
ignition switch is in ON (w.
■Mirror position adjustment
L/R selector switch: Select the left or right
mirror. After adjusting the mirror, return the
switch to the center position.
Mirror position adjustment switch: Press
the switch left, right, up, or down to move
the mirror.
■Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
1Adjusting the Mirror
Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and
adjusted for best visibility.
Adjust the mirrors before you start driving.
2Adjusting the Seat Positions P. 116
1Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
The auto dimming function cancels when the shift
position is in (R.
Indicator
Auto Button
Sensor
Selector Switch
Adjustment Switch
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 114 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
115
uuAdjusting the MirroruPower Door Mirrors
If activated, the passenger side door mirror
automatically tilts downward when you put
the shift lever in (R; this improves close-in
visibility on the passenger side of the vehicle
when backing up. The mirror automatically
returns to its original position when you shift
out of (R.
To activate this feature, turn the ignition
switch to ON (w and slide the selector switch
to the passenger’s side.
■Reverse Tilt Door Mirror
Selector Switch
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 115 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Controls
TOC
116
Controls
Adjusting the Seats
Adjusting the Seat Positions
Adjust the driver’s seat as far back as possible
while allowing you to maintain full control of
the vehicle. You should be able to sit upright,
well back in the seat and be able to
adequately press the pedals without leaning
forward, and grip the steering wheel
comfortably. The passenger’s seat should be
adjusted in a similar manner, so that it is as far
back from the front airbag in the dashboard
as possible.
■Adjusting the front seat
1Adjusting the Seats
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
and Transport Canada recommend that drivers allow
at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the
steering wheel and the chest.
Always make seat adjustments before driving.
3
WARNING
Sitting too close to a front airbag can result
in serious injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the front
airbags as possible while maintaining
control of the vehicle.
Move back.
Allow sufficient
space.
Horizontal Position
Adjustment
Height Adjustment
(Driver’s seat only)
Seat-back Angle
Adjustment
Driver’s seat is shown
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 116 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
Continued 117
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a comfortable,
upright position, leaving ample space
between your chest and the airbag cover in
the center of the steering wheel.
The front seat passenger should also adjust
their seat-back to a comfortable, upright
position.
Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the
occupant’s chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the
chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a
seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury.
■Adjusting the Seat-Backs
1Adjusting the Seat-Backs
Do not put a cushion, or other object, between the
seat-back and your back.
Doing so may interfere with proper seat belt or airbag
operation.
If you cannot get far enough away from the steering
wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some type of adaptive
equipment may help.
3
WARNING
Reclining the seat-back too far can result in
serious injury or death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an upright position,
and sit well back in the seat.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 117 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Controls
TOC
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
118
Controls
Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints
in all seating positions.
Head restraints are most effective for
protection against whiplash and other rear-
impact crash injuries when the center of the
back of the occupant’s head rests against the
center of the restraint. The tops of the
occupant’s ears should be level with the
center height of the restraint.
■Adjusting the front and rear outer head restraint positions
To raise the head restraint: Pull it upward.
To lower the head restrain: Push it down
while pressing the release button.
■Adjusting the Head Restraints
1Adjusting the Head Restraints
The driver’s and front passenger’s seats have active
head restraints.
2Active Head Restraints P. 122
3
WARNING
Improperly positioning head restraints
reduces their effectiveness and increases
the likelihood of serious injury in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are in place and
positioned properly before driving.
Position head in the center
of the head restraint.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 118 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
Continued 119
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
A passenger sitting in the center back seating
position should adjust the height of their head
restraint to an appropriate position before the
vehicle begins moving.
To raise the head restraint:
Pull it upward.
To lower the head restraint:
Push it down while pressing the r
Head restraints can be removed for cleaning or repair.
To remove a head restraint:
Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then push the release button, and pull the
restraint up and out.
To reinstall a head restraint:
Insert the legs back in place, then adjust the head restraint to an appropriate height
while pressing the release button. Pull up on the restraint to make sure it is locked
in position.
■Changing the Center Rear Seat Head Restraint Position
■Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints
1Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints
3
WARNING
Failure to reinstall, or correctly reinstall, the
head restraints can result in severe injury
during a crash.
Always replace the head restraints before
driving.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 119 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Controls
TOC
release button.
120
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
Controls
The firmness of the seat-back can be adjusted.
To make it firmer:
Pull the lever backward.
To make it less firm:
Push the lever forward.
■Adjusting the Driver’s Seat Lumbar Support
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 120 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
Continued 121
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints, and put on
their seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in
their seats, with their feet on the floor, until the vehicle is safely parked and the
engine is off.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example,
if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is
greatly increased.
In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or
fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.
■Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
3
WARNING
Sitting improperly or out of position can
result in serious injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in the seat,
with your feet on the floor.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 121 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Controls
TOC
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
122
Controls
The driver’s and front passenger’s seats have active head restraints. In a rear impact,
an occupant properly secured by a seat belt will be pushed against the seat-back and
the head restraint will move forward. This reduces the distance between the
restraint and the occupant’s head, which helps reduce the likelihood of whiplash
and injuries to the neck and upper spine.
■Active Head Restraints
1Active Head Restraints
In order for the active head restraints to operate
properly:
•Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or
from the restraint legs.
•Do not place any object between an occupant and
the seat-back.
•Install each restraint in its proper location.
After a collision, the activated restraint should return
to its normal position. If the restraint does not return
to its normal position, or in the event of a severe
collision, have the vehicle inspected by a dealer.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 122 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
123
uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats
Rear Seats
1. Remove the center shoulder belt from
the guide.
2. Pull the release lever in the trunk to release
the lock.
3. Fold the seat-back down.
If the rear head restraints get caught on the
front seat-backs, remove the head restraints.
2Removing and Reinstalling the Head
Restraints P. 119
■Folding Down the Rear Seats
1Folding Down the Rear Seats
The rear seat-backs can be folded down to
accommodate bulkier items in the trunk.
Never drive with a seat-back folded down and the
trunk lid open.
2Carbon Monoxide Gas P. 60
To lock a seat-back upright, push it backwards until it
locks.
When returning a seat-back to it’s original position,
push it firmly back. Also, make sure all rear shoulder
belts are positioned in front of the seat-back, and the
center shoulder belt is re-positioned in the guide.
Make sure that the folded seat-back does not press
against the front passenger seat, as this can cause the
weight sensors in the front passenger seat to work
improperly.
2Passenger Airbag Off Indicator P. 45
Also make sure all items in the trunk or items
extending through the opening into the rear
seats are properly secured. Loose items can fly
forward if you have to brake hard.
Guide
Center
Shoulder
Belt
Release
Lever
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 123 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Controls
TOC
124
uuAdjusting the SeatsuArmrest
Controls
Armrest
The console lid can be used as an armrest.
To adjust:
Push the release lever and slide the armrest to
a desired position. Release the lever to lock
the position.
Pull down the armrest in the center seat-back.
■Using the Front Seat Armrest
■Using the Rear Seat Armrest
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 124 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
125
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items
Interior Lights
■ON
The interior lights come on regardless of
whether the doors are open or closed.
■Door activated
The interior lights come on in the
following situations:
•When any of the doors are opened.
•You unlock the driver’s door.
•You remove the key from the ignition
switch.
■OFF
The interior lights remain off regardless of
whether the doors are open or closed.
The map lights can be turned on and off by
pressing the lenses.
■Interior Light Switches
1Interior Light Switches
In the door activated position, the interior lights fade
out and go off about 30 seconds after the doors are
closed.
The lights go off after 30 seconds in the following
situations:
•When you unlock the driver’s door but do not open
it.
•When you remove the key from the ignition switch
but do not open a door.
You can change the interior lights dimming time.
2Customized Features P. 80
The interior lights go off immediately in the following
situations:
•When you lock the driver’s door.
•When you close the driver’s door with the key in
the ignition switch.
•When you turn the ignition switch to ON (w.
If you leave any of the doors open without the key in
the ignition switch, the interior lights go off after
about 15 minutes.
Door Activated Position
Off
Front
Door Activated Position
On
Off
Rear
On
■Map Lights
1Map Lights
When the ceiling light switch is in the door activated
position and any door is open, the map light will not
go off when you press the lens.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 125 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Controls
TOC
126
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls
Interior Convenience Items
Pull the handle to open the glove box. You
can lock the glove box with the master key.
■Detachable shelf
The shelf in the glove box is detachable. To
remove it, disengage the tabs.
■Glove Box
1Glove Box
The glove box light comes on when the parking lights
are on.
3
WARNING
An open glove box can cause serious injury
to your passenger in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat belt.
Always keep the glove box closed while
driving.
Glove Box
To Lock
Shelf
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 126 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
Continued 127
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Pull the handle to open the console
compartment.
To use the console lid as an armrest, slide it to
the desired position while pulling up the
release lever.
You can keep beverage bottles and cans cool
with the air conditioning system.
1. Turn the dial counterclockwise to open the
air vent in the console compartment.
2. Turn on the climate control system and
adjust the temperature to cool.
3. Set the mode control or .
uThe cool air is diverted through the
air vent.
■Console Compartment
1Console Compartment
Use only resealable containers or keep unopened
cans in the console compartment.
Spilled liquids can damage the upholstery and
electrical components in the console compartment.
When the heater begins to divert warm air, the
airflow into the console compartment is shut off.
Close
Open
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 127 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Controls
TOC
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
128
Controls
■Front seat beverage holders
Press the raised detent to open the lid. To
close the lid, push it down until it latches.
■Rear seat beverage holders
Fold the armrest down to use the rear seat
beverage holders.
■Beverage Holders
1Beverage Holders
NOTICE
Spilled liquids can damage the upholstery, carpeting,
and electrical components in the interior.
Be careful when you are using the beverage holders.
Hot liquid can scald you.
Push
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 128 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
Continued 129
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
There are two accessory power sockets; one in
the console compartment and the other at the
front of the center console. They can be used
when the ignition switch is in ACCESSORY (q
or ON (w.
Open the cover to use it.
■Accessory Power Sockets
1Accessory Power Sockets
NOTICE
Do not insert an automotive type cigarette lighter
element.
This can overheat the power socket.
The accessory power socket is designed to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories that are rated 120
watts or less (10 amps).
To prevent battery drain, only use the power socket
with the engine running.
When both sockets are being used, the combined
power rating of the accessories should not exceed
120 watts (10 amps).
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 129 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Controls
TOC
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
130
Controls
There are coat hooks on the rear left and right
grab handles. Pull them down to use them.
The cargo hooks in the trunk can be used to
install a net for securing items.
■Coat Hooks
1Coat Hooks
The coat hooks are not designed for large or heavy
items.
■Cargo Hooks
1Cargo Hooks
Distribute cargo evenly on the floor of the trunk,
placing the heaviest items on the bottom and as far
forward as possible.
2Maximum Load Limit P. 185
Hooks
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 130 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
Continued 131
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
To open the sunglasses holder, push and
release the indent. To close, push it again until
it latches.
You can store eyeglasses and other small
items in this holder.
■Sunglasses Holder
1Sunglasses Holder
Keep the holder closed while driving except when
accessing stored items.
Push
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 131 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Controls
TOC
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
132
Controls
The ignition switch must be in ON (w to use
the seat heaters. The HI setting heats the seats
faster than the LO setting.
There is no heater in the passenger’s seat-
back due to the side airbag cutoff system.
While in HI, the heater cycles on and off.
uThe appropriate indicator will be on
while the seat heater is on. Briefly
press the button on the opposite side
to turn the heater off. The indicator
will be off. When a comfortable
temperature is reached, select LO to
keep the seat warm.
■Seat Heaters
1Seat Heaters
Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the
engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may
be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.
In the LO setting, the heater runs continuously and
does not automatically turn off after a period of time.
3
WARNING
Heat induced burns are possible when
using seat heaters.
Persons with a diminished ability to sense
temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes,
lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or
with sensitive skin should not use seat
heaters.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 132 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
133
Continued
Climate Control System
Using Automatic Climate Control
The automatic climate control system maintains the interior temperature you select.
The system also selects the proper mix of heated or cooled air that will as quickly as
possible, raise or lower the interior temperature to your preference.
Use the system when the engine is running.
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the interior temperature using the driver’s side or passenger’s side control
switch.
3. Press the ON/OFF button to cancel.
■Switching between the recirculation and fresh air modes
Press the (recirculation) button and switch the mode depending on
environmental conditions.
Recirculation Mode (indicator on): Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior through
the system.
Fresh Air Mode (indicator off): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in
fresh air mode in normal situations.
1Using Automatic Climate Control
If any buttons are pressed while using the climate
control system in auto, the function of the button
that was pressed will take priority.
The AUTO indicator will go off, but functions
unrelated to the button that was pressed will be
controlled automatically.
To prevent cold air from blowing in from outside, the
fan may not start immediately when the AUTO
button is pressed.
Once you have set the desired temperature, do not
use the temperature control switches more than
necessary.
Doing so may delay the time it takes to reach the set
temperature.
If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down
more rapidly by partially opening the windows,
turning the system on auto, and setting the
temperature to low. Change the fresh mode to
recirculation mode until the temperature cools down.
When you set the temperature to the lower or upper
limit, Lo or Hi is displayed.
Pressing the ON/OFF button switches the climate
control system between on and off. When turned on,
the system returns to your last selection.
Floor and
defroster
vents
Floor ventsDashboard and floor
vents, and back of
the center console*
Dashboard vents
and back of the
center console*
AUTO Button
Driver’s Side
Temperature
Control Switch
(Recirculation) Button (Fan Control) Bar
A/C (Air Conditioning)
Button
Passenger’s Side
Temperature
Control Switch
* Not available on all models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 133 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Controls
TOC
uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control
134
Controls
Pressing the button turns the air
conditioner system on and automatically
switches the system to fresh air mode.
Press the button again to turn off, the
system returns to the previous settings.
■To rapidly defrost the windows
1. Press the button.
2. Press the button.
■Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
For your safety, make sure you have a clear view
through all the windows before driving.
Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower
limit.
When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the
windshield may fog up.
If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that
the air hits the side windows.
1To rapidly defrost the windows
After defrosting or defogging the windows, switch
over to fresh air mode. If you keep the system in
recirculation mode, the windows may fog up from
humidity. This impedes visibility.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 134 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
135
uuClimate Control SystemuSynchronized Mode
Synchronized Mode
You can set the temperature synchronously for the driver side and the passenger
side in synchronized mode.
1. Press the SYNC button.
uThe system will switch to synchronized mode.
2. Adjust the temperature using driver’s side temperature control switch.
Press the SYNC button to return to dual mode.
1Synchronized Mode
When you press the button, the system changes
to synchronized mode.
When the system is in dual mode, the driver side
temperature and the passenger side temperature can
be set separately.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 135 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Controls
TOC
136
uuClimate Control SystemuAutomatic Climate Control Sensors
Controls
Automatic Climate Control Sensors
The automatic climate control system is
equipped with a sunlight sensor and an
interior temperature sensor. Do not cover or
spill any liquid on them.
Sunlight Sensor
Temperature Sensor
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 136 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
137
Features
This chapter describes how to operate technology features.
Audio System
About Your Audio System................ 138
USB Adapter Cable .......................... 139
Auxiliary Input Jack .......................... 140
Audio System Theft Protection ......... 140
Audio System Basic Operation
Adjusting the Sound ........................ 142
Playing the AM/FM Radio ................. 143
Playing the XM® Radio ..................... 145
Playing a CD .................................... 147
Playing an iPod®............................... 150
Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 153
Playing Bluetooth® Audio................. 156
Audio Error Messages
CD Player......................................... 158
iPod®/USB Flash Drive....................... 159
Audio Remote Controls.................... 160
General Information on the Audio
System
XM® Radio Service ........................... 161
Recommended CDs ......................... 162
Compatible iPod® and USB Flash Drives... 164
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver
Training HomeLink........................... 165
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Using HFL ........................................ 167
HFL Menus ...................................... 169
Compass*.......................................... 179
* Not available on all models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 137 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
138
Features
Audio System
About Your Audio System
On models with the navigation system, see the Navigation System Manual for
operation of the audio system, AcuraLink*, Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®, and voice
commands for these features.
The audio system features AM/FM radio and the XM® Radio service. It can also play
CDs, WMA/MP3/AAC files, iPod®, USB flash drives, and Bluetooth® devices.
You can operate the audio system from the buttons and switches on the panel, or
the remote controls on the steering wheel.
1About Your Audio System
XM® Radio is available on a subscription basis only.
For more information on XM® Radio, contact a
dealer.
2General Information on the Audio System
P. 161
XM® Radio is available in the United States and
Canada, except Hawaii, Alaska, and Puerto Rico.
XM® is a registered trademark of Sirius XM Radio, Inc.
Video CDs, DVDs, and 3-inch (8-cm) mini CDs are not
supported.
iPod® is a registered trademark owned by Apple Inc.
State or local laws may limit the circumstances in
which you can launch or control your attached audio
device.
Remote Control
iPod®
USB Flash
Drive
XM® Radio
* Not available on all models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 138 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
139
uuAudio SystemuUSB Adapter Cable
USB Adapter Cable
1. Unclip the USB connector and loosen the
adapter cable.
2. Connect the iPod® dock connector or the
USB flash drive to the USB connector.
1USB Adapter Cable
•Do not leave the iPod® or USB flash drive in the
vehicle. Direct sunlight and high temperatures may
damage it.
•Do not use an extension cable with the USB
adapter cable.
•Do not connect the iPod® or USB flash drive using a
hub.
•Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard
disk drive, as the device or your files may be
damaged.
•We recommend backing up your data before using
the device in your vehicle.
•Displayed messages may vary depending on the
device model and software version.
If the audio system does not recognize the iPod®, try
reconnecting it a few times or reboot the device. To
reboot, follow the manufacturer’s instructions
provided with the iPod® or visit www.apple.com/
ipod.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 139 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Features
TOC
140
uuAudio SystemuAuxiliary Input Jack
Features
Auxiliary Input Jack
Use the jack in the console compartment to connect standard audio devices.
1. Open the AUX cover.
2. Connect a standard audio device to the
input jack using a 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) stereo
miniplug.
uThe audio system automatically switches
to the AUX mode.
Audio System Theft Protection
The audio system is disabled when it is disconnected from the power source, such as
when the battery is disconnected or goes dead.
■Entering the audio security code
ENTER CODE appears on the display when the power is reconnected.
1. Turn on the audio system.
2. Enter the audio security code using the preset buttons. If you enter an incorrect
digit, continue to the last digit, then try again. If you do not enter the code
correctly after 10 tries, you need to visit a dealer to have the system reset.
1Auxiliary Input Jack
To switch the mode, press any of the audio mode
buttons. You can return to the AUX mode by
pressing the AUX button.
You cannot use the auxiliary input jack if you replace
the audio system.
1Audio System Theft Protection
Find the audio system’s security code and serial
number on the radio code card.
Do not store the card in your vehicle. If you lose the
radio code card, you must obtain the information
from a dealer.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 140 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
141
Audio System Basic Operation
To use the audio system function, the ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or
ON (w.
Use the selector knob or MENU button to
access some audio functions.
Press to switch between the normal and
extended display for some functions. The
extended display has three segments to
display detailed information.
Selector knob: Rotate left or right to scroll
through the available choices. Press to set
your selection.
MENU button: Press to select any setting
such as the clock, sound control, or the
compass. Press this button again to cancel the
menu display mode.
RETURN button: Press to go back to the
previous display.
1Audio System Basic Operation
These indications are used to show how to operate
the selector knob.
Rotate to select.
Press to enter.
RETURN
Button
Selector
Knob
MENU
Button
Menu Display
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 141 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Features
TOC
142
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound
Features
Adjusting the Sound
Press the MENU button, and rotate to
adjust the setting. Rotate to scroll through
the following choices:
1Adjusting the Sound
When the adjustment level reaches the center, you
will see C in the display.
The SVC has four modes: OFF, LOW, MID, and
HIGH.
SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle
speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As
you slow down, audio volume decreases.
FADER is selectable.
Selector
Knob
MENU
Button
RETURN
Button
BASS
TREBLE
FADER
BALANCE
SUBW
SVC
CLOCK ADJUST
Speed-sensitive
Volume
Compensation
Subwoofer
Clock setting
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 142 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
143
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the AM/FM Radio
Continued
Playing the AM/FM Radio
AM/FM Button
Press to select a band.
SCAN Button
Press to sample each of the strongest
stations on the selected band for 10 seconds.
To turn off scan, press the button again.
Knob
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
VOL/
Preset Buttons (1-6)
To store a station:
1. Tune to the selected station.
2. Pick a preset button and hold it
until you hear a beep.
To listen to a stored station, select a
band, then press the preset button.
Selector Knob
Turn to tune the radio frequency.
TITLE Button
Press to switch the RDS name
on and off.
CATEGORY Bar
Press either side to display and
select an RDS category.
SKIP Bar
Press and hold to search up and
down the selected band for a
station with a strong signal.
A.SEL (Auto Select) Button
Press to scan both bands and store
the strongest station in each preset.
To turn off auto select, press the
button again. This restores the
presets you originally set.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 143 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Features
TOC
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the AM/FM Radio
144
Features
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS capable FM station.
■RDS INFO ON
Press the TITLE button while listening to an RDS capable station. RDS INFO ON
appears, and the station name is displayed.
■To find an RDS station from your selected program category
1. Press the CATEGORY bar to display and
select an RDS category.
2. Use SKIP or SCAN to select an RDS station.
■Radio Data System (RDS)
1Playing the AM/FM Radio
The ST indicator appears on the display indicating
stereo FM broadcasts.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
Switching the Audio Mode
Press the MODE button on the steering wheel.
2Audio Remote Controls P. 160
You can store six AM stations and twelve FM stations
in the preset buttons. FM1 and FM2 let you store six
stations each.
A.SEL function scans and stores up to six AM stations
and twelve FM stations with a strong signal in the
preset buttons.
If you do not like the stations auto select has stored,
you can store other frequencies in the preset buttons
manually.
1Radio Data System (RDS)
The display shows up to 31 characters of text data.
Press and hold the TITLE button to see additional
characters. indicates that the text data continues.
The display goes back to the previous screen if you
press and hold the button again.
RDS Category
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 144 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
145
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the XM® Radio
Continued
Playing the XM® Radio
(XM®) Button
Press to select XM® Radio.
TITLE Button
Press and release to cycle the
display between the name, title,
and category.
CATEGORY Bar
Press either side to display and
select an XM® Radio category.
SCAN Button
Press to sample all channels (in the channel
mode), or channels within a category (in the
category mode).
Each sampling continues for a few seconds.
Press SCAN again to cancel scanning and
continue listening to the channel.
Knob
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
VOL/
Preset Buttons (1-6)
To store the channel:
1. Select the channel.
2. Pick a preset button and hold it
until you hear a beep.
To listen to a stored station, select
XM, then press the preset button.
SKIP Bar
Press to skip to the previous or
next channel.
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.
Selector Knob
Turn to select channels.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 145 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Features
TOC
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the XM® Radio
146
Features
1. Press the button to select the XM® radio band (XM1 or XM2).
2. Press and hold the TITLE button to switch between the channel mode and
category mode.
If you press the MENU button, rotate to select MODE/CATEGORY or MODE
CHANNEL. Each time you press , the mode switches between them.
Press the button to enter the setting.
3. Select a channel using the TUNE ( ), SKIP, CATEGORY, SCAN, or
1. Press to display a channel list.
2. Rotate to select a channel, then
press
.
■To Play the XM® Radio
■To Select a Channel from a List
1Playing the XM® Radio
In the channel mode, all available channels are
selectable. In the category mode, you can select a
channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.).
You can store twelve XM® stations in the preset
buttons. XM1 and XM2 let you store six stations
each.
There may be instances when XM® Radio does not
broadcast all the data fields (artist name, title). This
does not indicate a problem with your audio system.
Channel list is shown.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 146 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
Preset buttons.
147
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
Continued
Playing a CD
Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs and CD-RWs in either MP3 or WMA format. With the CD loaded, press the CD button.
SCAN Button
You will get a 10-second sampling of each song.
●Press to sample all tracks on the CD (all files
in the current folder in MP3 or WMA).
●Press two times to sample the first file in
each of the main folders (MP3 or WMA).
●To turn off scan, press and hold the button.
Knob
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
VOL/
CD Slot
Insert a CD about halfway into the
CD slot.
SKIP Bar
Press or to change tracks
(files in MP3 or WMA).
CD Button
Press to play a CD.
(CD Eject) Button
Press to eject a CD.
CATEGORY Bar
Press to skip to the next folder,
and to skip to the beginning of
the previous folder in MP3 or WMA.
TITLE Button
Press to display the text data on a CD
(if it was recorded with text data).
MENU Button
Press to display menu items
(if available).
Selector Knob
Turn to change tracks/files. Turn
to select an item, then press
ENTER to set your selection.
RETURN Button
Press to go back to the previous
display.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 147 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Features
TOC
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
148
Features
1. Press to switch the display to a folder list.
2. Rotate to select a folder.
3. Press to change the display to a list of
files in that folder.
4. Rotate to select a file, then press .
■How to Select a File from a Folder with the
Selector Knob (MP3/WMA)
1Playing a CD
NOTICE
Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can
cause the CD to jam in the unit.
WMA files protected by digital rights management
(DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays UNSUPPORTED, then
skips to the next file.
Text data appears on the display under the following
circumstances:
•When you select a new folder, file, or track.
•When you change the audio mode to CD.
•When you insert a CD.
The display shows up to 31 characters of text data.
Press and hold the TITLE button to see additional
characters. indicates that the text data continues.
The display goes back to the previous screen if you
press and hold the button again.
If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot,
the system reloads the CD automatically after several
seconds.
Folder Selection
Track Selection
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 148 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
149
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
You can select repeat, random, and scan modes when playing a track or files.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select PLAY MODE, then
press .
3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .
■To turn off a play mode
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select PLAY MODE, then press .
3. Rotate to select NORMAL PLAY, then press .
■How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Press the RETURN button to go back to the previous
display, and press the MENU button to cancel this
setting mode.
Play Mode Menu Items
NORMAL PLAY
REPEAT ONE TRACK: Repeats the current track/
file(s).
REPEAT ONE FLD (MP3/WMA): Repeats all files in
the current folder.
RANDOM IN DISC: Plays all tracks/files in random
order.
RANDOM IN FLD (MP3/WMA): Plays all files in the
current folder in random order.
SCAN TRK: Samples all tracks on the CD.
(MP3/WMA): Samples all files in the current folder.
SCAN FLD (MP3/WMA): Samples the first file in
each folder.
Play Mode
Items
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 149 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Features
TOC
150
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®
Features
Playing an iPod®
Connect the iPod® using your dock connector to the USB adapter cable, then press the AUX button.
2USB Adapter Cable P. 139
Knob
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
VOL/
SKIP Bar
Press or to change songs.
Selector Knob
Turn to select a song, file, menu
item, or play mode. Press ENTER
to set your selection.
AUX Button
Press to select iPod® (if connected).
TITLE Button
Press to display the text data.
RETURN Button
Press to go back to the previous display.
MENU Button
Press to display menu items.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 150 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
Continued 151
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®
1. Press to display the iPod® menu.
2. Rotate to select a menu.
3. Press to display the items on that menu.
4. Rotate to select an item, then press .
■How to Select a File from the iPod® Menu
1Playing an iPod®
Available operating functions vary on models or
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle’s audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio display.
2iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 159
iPod® Menu:
Playlists, Artists,
Albums, and Songs
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 151 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Features
TOC
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®
152
Features
You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a file.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select PLAY MODE, then
press .
3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .
■To turn off a play mode
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select PLAY MODE, then press .
3. Rotate to select NORMAL PLAY, then press .
■How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
NORMAL PLAY
SHUFFLE OFF: Turns off the shuffle mode.
REPEAT OFF: Turns off the repeat mode.
REPEAT ONE TRACK: Repeats the current track.
SHUFFLE ALL: Plays all available files in a selected list
(playlists, artists, albums or songs) in random order.
SHUFFLE ALBUM: Plays all available albums in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums, or songs) in
random order.
Play Mode Items
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 152 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
153
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Continued
Playing a USB Flash Drive
Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3, WMA or ACC format.
*1
Connect your USB flash drive to the USB adapter cable, then press the AUX button.
2USB Adapter Cable P. 139
*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes ® are playable on this audio unit.
SCAN Button
You will get a 10-second sampling of each file.
●Press to sample all files in the current folder.
●Press two times to sample the first file in
each of the main folders.
●To turn off scan, press and hold the button.
RETURN Button
Press to go back to the previous
display.
Selector Knob
Turn to select a file, then press
ENTER set your selection.
AUX Button
Press to select USB flash drive
(if connected).
Knob
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
VOL/
SKIP Bar
Press or to change files.
MENU Button
Press to display menu items.
TITLE Button
Press to display the text data.
CATEGORY Bar
Press to skip to the next folder,
and to skip to the beginning of
the previous folder.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 153 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Features
TOC
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
154
Features
1. Press to switch the display to a folder list.
2. Rotate to select a folder.
3. Press to change the display to a list of
files in that folder.
4. Rotate to select a file, then press .
■How to Select a File from a Folder with the Selector Knob
1Playing a USB Flash Drive
Use the recommended USB flash drives.
2General Information on the Audio System
P. 161
Files in WMA format protected by digital rights
management (DRM) are not played.
The audio system displays UNPLAYABLE FILE, and
then skips to the next file.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio display.
2iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 159
Folder Selection
Track Selection
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 154 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
155
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
You can select repeat, random, and scan modes when playing a file(s).
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select PLAY MODE, then
press .
3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .
■To turn off a play mode
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select PLAY MODE, then press .
3. Rotate to select NORMAL PLAY, then press .
■How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
NORMAL PLAY
REPEAT ONE TRACK: Repeats the current file.
REPEAT ONE FLD: Repeats all files in the current
folder.
RANDOM IN FLD: Plays all files in the current folder
in random order.
RANDOM ALL: Plays all files in random order.
SCAN TRK: Samples all files in the current folder.
SCAN FLD: Samples the first file in each folder.
Play Mode Items
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 155 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Features
TOC
156
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
Features
Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth®-compatible
phone.
This function is available when the phone is paired and linked to the vehicle’s
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2Phone Setup P. 171
1Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming
audio capabilities are compatible with the system.
You can find an approved phone by visiting
www.acura.com/handsfreelink, or by calling the
HandsFreeLink® consumer support at
In Canada, visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call
In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data
device functions while driving.
If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system,
there will be a delay before the system begins to play.
Selector Knob
Turn to change files. Turn
to select an item, then press
ENTER to set your selection.
AUX Button
Press to select
Bluetooth® Audio.
SKIP Bar
Press or to
change files.
RETURN Button
Press to go back to
the previous display.
MENU Button
Press to display
menu items.
Knob
Press to turn the audio
system on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
VOL/
TITLE Button
Press to confirm
the device name.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 156 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
1-888-528-7876.
1-888-528-7876.
157
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
1. Make sure that your phone is linked to HFL.
2. Press the AUX button.
Check the following if the phone is not recognized:
Another HFL-compatible phone, which is not compatible for Bluetooth® Audio, is
already linked.
■To pause or resume a file
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select RESUME/PAUSE, then press .
Each time you press , the setting switches between PAUSE and RESUME.
Press the (HFL Talk) button on the steering
wheel to receive a call when Bluetooth® Audio
is playing.
2Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 167
Press the (HFL Back) button to end the call
and return to Bluetooth® Audio.
■To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
■Switching to HFL
1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
To play the audio files, you may need to operate your
phone. If so, follow the phone maker’s operating
instructions.
The pause function may not be available on some
phones.
If any audio device is connected to the auxiliary input
jack, you may need to press the AUX button
repeatedly to select the Bluetooth® Audio system.
Switching to another mode pauses the music playing
from your phone.
1Switching to HFL
If you receive a call while Bluetooth® Audio is in the
pause mode, it will resume play after ending the call.
Button
Button
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 157 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Features
TOC
158
Features
Audio Error Messages
CD Player
If a disc error occurs, you may see the following error messages.
Error Message Cause Solution
HEAT ERROR High temperature ●Turn the audio system off and allow the player to cool down until
the error message is cleared.
UNSUPPORTED Track/file format not supported ●Current track/file will be skipped. The next supported track/file
plays automatically.
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNERS MANUAL
PUSH EJECT Mechanical error
●Press the (eject) button and remove the disc, and check that the
error message is cleared.
●Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed, and insert the
disc again.
2Protecting CDs P. 163
●If the error message reappears, press the button, and pull out
the disc.
●Insert a different disc.
If the new disc plays, there is a problem with the first disc.
●If the error message repeats, or the disc cannot be removed,
contact your dealer.
Do not try to force the disc out of the player.
MECH ERROR
CHECK DISK LOAD
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNERS MANUAL
Servo error
CHECK DISC Disc error ●Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed.
2Protecting CDs P. 163
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 158 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
159
uuAudio Error MessagesuiPod®/USB Flash Drive
iPod®/USB Flash Drive
If an error occurs while playing an iPod® or USB flash drive, you may see the following error messages. If you cannot clear the error
message, contact a dealer.
Error Message Solution
USB ERROR There is a problem with the USB adapter unit.
BAD USB DEVICE
PLEASE CHECK
OWNERS MANUAL
An incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then turn the audio system off, and turn
it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.
iPod NO SONG Appears when the iPod® is empty.
UNSUPPORTED VER. Appears when an unsupported iPod® is connected. If it appears when a supported iPod® is connected,
update the iPod® software to the newer version.
CONNECT RETRY Appears when the system does not acknowledge the iPod®. Reconnect the iPod®.
UNPLAYABLE FILE Appears when the files in the USB flash drive are DRM or an unsupported format. This error message
appears for about 3 seconds, then plays the next song.
USB NO SONG Appears when the USB flash drive is empty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flash
drive.
UNSUPPORTED Appears when an unsupported device is connected. If it appears when the supported device is
connected, reconnect the device.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 159 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Features
TOC
160
Features
Audio Remote Controls
Allows you to operate the audio system while driving.
MODE Button
Cycles through the audio modes as follows:
FM1 FM2 AM XM1 XM2 CD AUX
VOL Button
Press : Increases the volume
Press : Decreases the volume
CH Button
•When listening to radio
Press (+: Selects the next preset radio station.
Press (-: Selects the previous preset radio station.
•When listening to a CD, USB flash drive or iPod®, or Bluetooth® audio
Press (+: Skips to the next song.
Press (-: Goes back to the beginning of the current or previous song.
1Audio Remote Controls
The CD mode appears only when a CD is loaded.
When in the AUX mode, the following are operable
from the remote controls:
•iPod®/USB flash drive connected to the USB
adapter cable
•Bluetooth® audio (with some phones only)
MODE Button
VOL (Volume)
Button
CH (Channel)
Button
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 160 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
161
General Information on the Audio System
XM® Radio Service
1. You need your radio ID ready before registering for subscription.
To see the ID in the display: Turn the selector knob until 0 appears.
2. Have your radio ID and credit card number ready, and either call or visit the XM®
website to subscribe.
Press the (XM®) button and stay in this mode for about 30 minutes until the
service is activated. Make sure your vehicle is in an open area with good reception.
LOADING: XM® is loading the audio or program information.
OFF AIR: The channel is not currently broadcasting.
UPDATING: The encryption code is being updated. Channels 0 and 1 still work
normally.
NO SIGNAL: The signal is too weak in the current location.
--------: No such channel exists, the channel is not part of your subscription, or the
artist or title information is unavailable.
ANTENNA: There is a problem with the XM® antenna. Contact a dealer.
■Subscribing to XM® Radio
■Receiving XM® Radio
■XM® Radio Display Messages
1Subscribing to XM® Radio
Contact Information for XM® Radio:
US: XM® Radio at www.siriusxm.com or
Canada: XM® Canada at www.xmradio.ca,
1Receiving XM® Radio
The XM® satellites are in orbit over the equator;
therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause
satellite reception interruptions. Satellite signals are
more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you travel from the
equator.
You may experience reception problems under the
following circumstances:
•In a location with an obstruction to the south of
your vehicle.
•In tunnels
•On the lower level of a multi-tiered road
•Large items carried on the roof rack
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 161 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Features
TOC
1-800-852-9696
1-877-209-0079
162
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuRecommended CDs
Features
Recommended CDs
•Use only high-quality CD-R or CD-RW discs labeled for audio use.
•Use only CD-R or CD-RW discs on which the recordings are closed.
•Play only standard round shaped CDs.
•Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.
•Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported.
1Recommended CDs
A Dual-disc cannot play on this audio unit. If recorded
under certain conditions, a CD-R or CD-RW may not
play either.
■CDs with MP3, WMA or AAC files
The CD packages or jackets should have one of these marks.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 162 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
163
uuGeneral Information on the Audio System uRecommended CDs
■Protecting CDs
Follow these precautions when handling or storing CDs:
•Store a CD in its case when it is not being played.
•When wiping a CD, use a soft clean cloth from the center to the outside edge.
•Handle a CD by its edge. Never touch either surface.
•Never insert foreign objects into the CD player.
•Keep CDs out of direct sunlight and extreme heat.
•Do not place stabilizer rings or labels on the CD.
•Avoid fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip pens on the CD.
1Protecting CDs
NOTICE
Do not insert a damaged CD. It may be stuck inside
and damage the audio unit.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 163 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Features
TOC
Examples:
●Damaged CDs
Bubbled/
Wrinkled
With Label/
Sticker
Using
Printer Label
Kit
Sealed With Plastic Ring
●Poor quality CDs
Chipped/
Cracked
Warped Burrs
●Small CDs
3-inch
(8-cm)
CD
●Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and
excessively thick CDs
164
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuCompatible iPod® and USB Flash Drives
Features
Compatible iPod® and USB Flash Drives
•Use a recommended USB flash drive of 256 MB or higher.
•Some digital audio players may not be compatible.
•Some USB flash drives (e.g., a device with security lockout) may not work.
•Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.
•Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported.
■iPod® Model Compatibility
Model
iPod® (5th generation)
iPod classic® 80/160GB (launched in 2007)
iPod classic® 120GB (launched in 2008)
iPod classic® 160GB (launched in 2009)
iPod touch® (launched in 2011)
iPod nano® (launched in 2011)
■USB Flash Drives
1iPod® Model Compatibility
This system may not work with all software versions
of these devices.
1USB Flash Drives
Files on the USB flash drive are played in their stored
order. This order may be different from the order
displayed on your PC or device.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 164 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
165
Continued
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver can be programmed to operate up to three
remote controlled devices around your home, such as garage doors, lighting, or
home security systems.
Refer to the safety information that comes with your garage door opener to test that
the safety features are functioning properly. If you do not have the safety
information, contact the manufacturer.
Before programming HomeLink, make sure that people and objects are out of the
way of the garage or gate to prevent potential injury or damage.
When programming a garage door opener, park just outside the garage
door’s path.
Training HomeLink
If you have not trained any of the buttons in
HomeLink before, you should erase any
previously learned codes. To do this:
•Press and hold the two outside buttons for
about 20 seconds, until the red indicator
blinks. Release the buttons, and proceed to
step 1.
•If you are training the second or third
button, go directly to step 1.
■Important Safety Precautions
1HomeLink® Universal Transceiver
HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Johnson
Controls., Inc.
Before programming HomeLink to operate a garage
door opener, confirm that the opener has an external
entrapment protection system, such as an “electronic
eye,” or other safety and reverse stop features. If it
does not, HomeLink may not be able to operate it.
Red Indicator
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 165 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Features
TOC
uuHomeLink® Universal TransceiveruTraining HomeLink
166
Features
■Training a Button
1Training HomeLink
Retraining a Button
If you want to retrain a programmed button for a
new device, you do not have to erase all button
memory. You can replace the existing memory code
using this procedure:
Erasing Codes
To erase all the codes, press and hold the two outside
buttons until the HomeLink indicator begins to blink
(about 10 to 20 secs). You should erase all codes
before selling the vehicle.
If you have any problems, see the device’s
instructions, visit www.homelink.com, or call
HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515.
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
HomeLink indicator begins to blink.
2. Continue to hold the HomeLink button and follow steps
1 - 3 under “Training a Button.”
Indicator remains on for
about 25 secs.
Standard transmitter
Indicator blinks rapidly for
two secs, then remains on
for about 23 secs.
Rolling code transmitter
1. Position the remote transmitter you wish to link 1 to 3 inches (3-8 cm) from the HomeLink
button you want to program.
2.
3.
Press and hold the desired HomeLink button and the button on
the remote transmitter.
Does the HomeLink indicator (LED) blink after 10 secs?
Press and hold the
programmed HomeLink
button for about a sec.
Does the device (garage
door opener) work?
a.
4.
5. a.
b.
Training
Complete
Press and hold the
HomeLink button again.
The remote-controlled
device should operate.
The remote has a rolling code. Press the
“learn” button on the remote-controlled
device (e.g. garage door opener).
Within 30 secs, press and hold the
programmed HomeLink button for 2 secs.
Press and hold the HomeLink button again.
Training Complete
NO
Press and hold the remote and the HomeLink
button at the same time. Then, while
continuing to hold the HomeLink button,
press and release the button on the remote
every 2 secs.
Dose the LED blink within 20 secs?
NO
YES
YES
NO
HomeLink LED
is on.
HomeLink indicator blinks for 2 secs,
then remains on.
YES
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 166 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
167
Continued
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
For models with the navigation system, see the Navigation System Manual for how
to operate Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®.
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using
your vehicle’s audio system, without handling your cell phone.
Using HFL
(HFL Talk) Button: Press to give a command or answer a call.
(HFL Back) Button: Press to end a call, go back to the previous command, or
cancel a command.
■HFL Buttons
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell
phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing
procedures, and special feature capabilities:
•U.S.: Visit www.acura.com/handsfreelink, or call
•Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call
Voice control tips:
•Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the
windows, as noise coming from them may interfere
with the microphone.
•Press and release the button before giving a
command. Speak clearly and naturally after a beep.
•If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,
the command may be misinterpreted.
•A command that consists of several words can be
spoken together. For example, say “Call 123-456-
7890” at once.
•When HFL is in use, navigation voice commands
cannot be recognized.
•To change the volume level, use the audio system’s
volume knob or the remote audio controls.
State or local laws may limit the circumstances in
which you can launch or control your attached audio
device.
Models with navigation system
Models without navigation system
MicrophoneAudio Remote
VOL (Volume)
Buttons
(HFL Talk) Button
(HFL Back) Button
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 167 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Features
TOC
1-888-528-7876.
1-888-528-7876.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL
168
Features
•To hear general HFL information and help, say “Tutorial.”
•Say “Hands free help” or “Help” any time to get help or hear a list of commands.
The multi-information display notifies you
when there is an incoming call.
■Help Features
■Information Display
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Bluetooth ® Wireless Technology
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any
use of such marks by Honda Motors Co., Ltd., is
under license. Other trademarks and trade names are
those of their respective owners.
HFL Limitations
An incoming call on HFL will interrupt Bluetooth®
Audio when it is playing. Audio will resume when the
call is ended.
1Information Display
The information that appears on the multi-
information display varies between phone models.
Signal
Strength
HFL Mode Battery
Level
Status
Roam Status
Phone
Number
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 168 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
169
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Continued
HFL Menus
The ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w to use HFL.
To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth-compatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle is parked.
Press the (HFL Talk) button each time you give a command
“Set pairing code”
Pair a phone to the system.
Edit the name of a paired phone.
Delete a paired phone from the system.
Hear a list of all phones paired to the system.
Hear which paired phone is linked, and its remaining battery life.
Search for another phone that has been paired.
Set the pairing code to either “Fixed” or “Random.”
Say a phone number.
Say a name after a phonebook entry is stored.
Redial the last number called.
Transfer a call from HFL to your phone or from your phone to HFL.
Mute your voice to the person at the other end of the call.
Send numbers or names during a call.
“Pair”
“Edit”
“Delete”
“List”
“Status”
“Next phone”
e.g.: “123-456-####”
e.g.: “Jim Smith”
“Phone setup”
“Call”/“Dial”
“Transfer”
“Mute”
“Send”
“Redial”
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 169 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Features
TOC
170
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
“Change passcode”
Store a phonebook entry.
Edit the number of an existing phonebook entry.
Delete a phonebook entry.
Transfer contacts from your phone to HFL.
Hear a list of all stored phonebook entries.
Apply a security passcode to the system that must be input at each key
cycle to access the system.
Change your security passcode.
Set how you want to be notified of an incoming call.
Set to automatically transfer calls from your phone to HFL when you
enter the vehicle.
Switch the system language between English and French.
Hear a tutorial for general rules on using the system.
Hear a list of available commands and additional information describing each command.
“Store”
“Edit”
“Delete”
“Receive contact”*
“List”
“Security”
“Call notification”
“Auto transfer”
“Phonebook”
“System setup”
“Change language”*
“Tutorial”
“Hands-free help”
Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries, and security
passcode.
“Clear”
* Not available on all models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 170 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
Continued 171
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
■To pair a cell phone
1. If no phone has been paired to the system before, HFL gives you information
about how to pair the first phone.
If a phone has already been paired: say “Phone Setup” and “Pair” after the HFL
prompts.
2. Follow the HFL prompts and put your phone in discovery or search mode.
uHFL gives you a four-digit code and begins searching for your phone.
3. When your phone finds a Bluetooth® device, select HFL from the options and
enter the four-digit code.
4. Follow the HFL prompts and name the newly paired phone.
■To rename a paired phone
1. Say “Phone Setup.”
2. Say “Edit” after the prompts.
3. Follow the HFL prompts and rename the phone.
uIf there is more than one phone paired to the system, HFL will ask you which
phone’s name you want to change.
■To delete a paired phone
1. Say “Phone Setup.”
2. Say “Delete” after the prompts.
3. Follow the HFL prompts.
uHFL will ask you which phone you want to delete.
■Phone Setup
1Phone Setup
Press the button and wait for a beep before
giving a command.
Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to
HFL before you can make and receive hands-free
calls.
Phone Pairing Tips:
•You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving.
•Your phone must be in the discovery or search
mode when pairing the phone. Refer to your
phone’s manual.
•Up to six phones can be paired.
•Your phone’s battery may drain faster when it is
paired to HFL.
•If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found
by the system within three minutes, the system will
time out and returns to idle.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 171 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Features
TOC
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
172
Features
■To hear the name of all paired phones
1. Say “Phone Setup.”
2. Say “List” after the prompts.
3. HFL reads out all the paired phones’ names.
■To hear which paired phone is currently linked
1. Say “Phone Setup.”
2. Say “Status” after the prompts.
3. HFL will tell you which phone is linked with the system.
■To change the currently linked phone
1. Say “Phone Setup.”
2. Say “Next Phone” after the prompts.
3. HFL disconnects the current phone, and searches for another paired phone.
4. Once another phone is found, it is connected to the system. HFL will inform you
which phone is now linked.
■To change the pairing code setting
1. Say “Phone Setup.”
2. Say “Set Pairing Code” after the prompts.
3. If you want HFL to create a random code each time you pair a phone, say
“Random.” If you want to create your own four-digit code, say “Fixed.”
4. Follow the HFL prompts.
1Phone Setup
If no other phones are found or paired when trying to
switch to another phone, HFL will inform you that the
original phone is linked again.
“Status” and “Next Phone” commands:
Only one paired phone at a time can be linked to HFL.
When there are two or more paired phones in the
vehicle, the first paired phone that the system finds is
linked.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 172 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
Continued 173
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
You can make calls using any phone number or a name in the HFL phonebook, and
redial the last number called.
■Direct dialing a phone number
1. Say “Call” or “Dial.”
2. Say the number you want to dial after the prompts.
3. Say “Call” or “Dial” after the prompts.
■From the HFL phonebook
1. Say “Call” or “Dial.”
2. Say the name stored in the HFL phonebook after the prompts.
3. Follow the HFL prompts.
■To redial the last number called by HFL
Say “Redial.”
■To end a call
Press the (HFL back) button.
■Making a Call
1Making a Call
Press the button and wait for a beep before
giving a command.
HFL uses a Class 2 Bluetooth, with has a maximum
range of about 30 feet (10 meters).
HFL allows you to talk up to 30 minutes after you
remove the key from the ignition switch. However,
this may weaken the vehicle’s battery.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 173 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Features
TOC
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
174
Features
Press the button to answer the call, or the button to hang up. When there
is an incoming call, a call notification (if activated) sounds and a message appears on
the display.
You can transfer a call from HFL to your phone, or from your phone to HFL. Press the
button and say “Transfer.”
To mute or unmute your voice during a call, press and release the button and
say “Mute.”
You can send numbers and names during a call. This is useful when calling a menu-
driven phone system.
■To send a number or name during a call
1. Say “Send.”
2. Say the number or name you want to send after the prompts.
3. Follow the HFL prompts.
■Receiving a Call
■Transferring a Call
■Muting a Call
■Sending Numbers or Names During a Call
1Receiving a Call
Call Waiting
Press the button and put the original call on hold
to answer the incoming call.
Press the button again to return to the original
call.
Ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer
it.
Press the button if you want to hang up the
original and answer the incoming call.
1Sending Numbers or Names During a Call
Press the button before a command.
To send a , say “Pound.” To send a , say “Star.”
#
*
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 174 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
Continued 175
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
You can store up to 50 names with their associated numbers in HFL. The numbers
you store can be account numbers or passwords. These numbers can be sent to an
automated phone system.
■To store a phonebook entry
1. Say “Phonebook.”
2. Say “Store” after the prompts.
3. Say a name you want to list as your phonebook entry.
4. Say the number you want to store for the name entry.
5. Follow the HFL prompts and say “Enter” to store the entry.
■To edit the number stored for a name
1. Say “Phonebook.”
2. Say “Edit” after the prompts.
3. Say a name you want to edit. When asked, say the new number for that name.
4. Follow the HFL prompts and say “Enter” to store the entry.
■HFL Phonebook
1HFL Phonebook
•Avoid using duplicate name entries.
•Avoid using “home” as a name entry.
•It is easier for HFL to recognize a multisyllabic or
longer name. For example, use “Peter” instead of
“Pete,” or “John Smith” instead of “John.”
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 175 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Features
TOC
176
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■To delete a name
1. Say “Phonebook.”
2. Say “Delete” after the prompts.
3. Say a name you want to delete.
4. Say “Yes,” and follow the HFL prompts.
■To list all names in the phonebook
1. Say “Phonebook.”
2. Say “List” after the prompts.
3. HFL begins reading the names in the order they were stored.
4. When you hear a name you want to call, say “Call.”
■To store a specific phone number from your cell phone directly
to the HFL phonebook *
1. Say “Phonebook.”
2. Say “Receive Contact” after the prompts.
3. Follow the HFL prompts, select a number from your cell phone, and send it to HFL.
uIf it is not the number you want to store, say “Discard.”
4. Say the name for that number.
5. Follow the HFL prompts to continue.
* Not available on all models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 176 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
Continued 177
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
This command group allows you to change or customize HFL basic settings.
■To set a four-digit passcode to lock the HFL system for security
1. Say “System Setup.”
2. Say “Security.”
3. Follow the HFL prompts and say the four-digit number of your choice.
4. Follow the HFL prompts and confirm the number.
■To change the security passcode
1. Say “System Setup.”
2. Say “Change Passcode” after the prompts.
3. Say the new four-digit passcode after the HFL prompts.
4. Follow the HFL prompts.
■To select a ring tone or a prompt as the incoming call notification
1. Say “System Setup.”
2. Say “Call Notification” after the prompts.
3. Say “Ring Tone” or “Prompt” after the prompts. For no audible notification,
say
“Off.”
■System Setup
1System Setup
Press the button before a command.
Once a passcode is set, you are required to enter the
passcode with every new key cycle to use HFL.
If you forget the code, go to your dealer to have the
passcode reset. You can also cancel the passcode by
clearing all the data stored in the HFL system.
2To clear the system P. 178
The default setting of the incoming notification is a
ring tone.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 177 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Features
TOC
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
178
Features
■To activate or deactivate the auto transfer function
The call on your cell phone can be automatically transferred to HFL when you get
into the vehicle and turn on the ignition.
1. Say “System Setup.”
2. Say “Auto Transfer” after the prompts. HFL lets you know the current status.
3. Follow the HFL prompts to change the setting.
■To clear the system
Paired phones, all stored or imported phonebook data, and any passcodes
are erased.
1. Say “System Setup.”
2. Say “Clear” after the prompts.
3. Follow the HFL prompts.
You can set the system language to French or English.
1. Say “Change Language.”
2. Follow the HFL prompts.
If you have not named your paired phone in the selected language, HFL will ask you
to name it in that language.
■Change Language*
1System Setup
Press the button before a command.
You can clear the system when you have forgotten
the passcode and cannot access HFL.
When HFL asks you for the passcode, say “System
Clear.”
1Change Language*
Press the button before a command.
Quick Language Selection
If you want to change the language, to French for
example, say “Français,” and follow the prompt.
* Not available on all models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 178 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
179
Compass*
When you turn the ignition switch to ON (w, the compass self-calibrates, and the
compass display appears.
Compass Calibration
If the compass indicates the wrong direction, or the CAL indicator blinks, you need
to manually calibrate the system.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w.
2. Press and hold the MENU button until the
display shows the compass setting menu
list.
3. Rotate to select CALIBRATION, then
press .
4. When the display changes to PUSH CAL
START, press .
5. Drive the vehicle slowly in two circles.
uThe compass starts to show a direction
after the calibration. The CAL indicator
goes off.
1Compass*
Compass operation can be affected under the
following conditions:
•Driving near power lines or stations
•Crossing a bridge
•Passing a large vehicle, or driving near a large
object that can cause a magnetic disturbance
•When accessories such as antennas and roof racks
are mounted by magnets
1Compass Calibration
Calibrate the compass in an open area.
While setting the compass:
•The RETURN button returns to the previous screen.
•The MENU button cancels the setting mode.
Compass Setting Menu Items
* Not available on all models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 179 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Features
TOC
180
uuCompass*uCompass Zone Selection
Features
Compass Zone Selection
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w.
2. Press and hold the MENU button until the
display shows the compass setting menu
list.
3. Rotate to select ZONE, then press .
The display shows the current zone
number.
4. Rotate to select the zone number of
your area (See Zone Map), then press .
1Compass Zone Selection
The zone selection is done to compensate the
variation between magnetic north and true north.
If the calibration starts while the audio system is in
use, the display returns to normal after the calibration
is completed.
Zone Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
78
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Zone Map
Guam Island: Zone 8
Puerto Rico: Zone 11
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 180 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
181
Driving
This chapter discusses driving, refueling, and information on items such as accessories.
Before Driving
Driving Preparation .......................... 182
Maximum Load Limit........................ 185
Towing a Trailer
Towing Preparation.......................... 187
Driving Safely with a Trailer .............. 189
Towing Your Vehicle........................ 190
When Driving
Starting the Engine .......................... 191
Precautions While Driving................. 193
Automatic Transmission ................... 194
Shifting............................................ 195
Shifting............................................ 199
Cruise Control ................................. 201
VSA
®
(Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC
(Electronic Stability Control), System ...... 204
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)... 206
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) -
Required Federal Explanation........... 208
Braking
Brake System ................................... 210
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ........... 212
Automatic transmission
Manual transmission
Brake Assist System ......................... 213
Parking Your Vehicle
When Stopped ................................ 214
Refueling
Fuel Information .............................. 215
How to Refuel ................................. 216
Fuel Economy.................................... 218
Improving Fuel Economy.................. 218
Accessories and Modifications
Accessories ...................................... 219
Modifications................................... 219
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 181 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
182
Driving
Before Driving
Driving Preparation
Check the following items before you start driving.
•Make sure there are no obstructions on the windows, door mirrors, exterior
lights, or other parts of the vehicle.
uRemove any frost, snow, or ice.
uRemove any snow on the roof, as this can slip down and obstruct your field of
vision while driving. If frozen solid, remove ice once it has softened.
uWhen removing ice from around the wheels, be sure not to damage the wheel
or wheel components.
•Make sure the hood is securely closed.
uIf the hood opens while driving, your front view will be blocked.
•Make sure the tires are in good condition.
uCheck air pressure, check for damage and excessive wear.
2Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 259
•Make sure there are no people or objects behind or around the vehicle.
uThere are blind spots from the inside.
■Exterior Checks
1Exterior Checks
NOTICE
When doors are frozen shut, use warm water around
the door edges to melt any ice. Do not try to force
them open, as this can damage the rubber trim
around the doors. When done, wipe dry to avoid
further freezing.
Do not pour warm water into the key cylinder.
You will be unable to insert key if the water freezes in
the hole.
Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite
flammable materials left under the hood, causing a
fire. If you’ve parked your vehicle for an extended
period, inspect and remove any debris that may have
collected, such as dried grass and leaves that have
fallen or have been carried in for use as a nest by a
small animal. Also check under the hood for leftover
flammable materials after you or someone else has
performed maintenance on your vehicle.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 182 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
Continued 183
uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation
•Store or secure all items on board properly.
uCarrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicle’s
handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe.
2Maximum Load Limit P. 185
•Do not pile items higher than the seat height.
uThey can block your view and may be thrown forward in the event of
sudden braking.
•Do not place anything in the front seat footwells. Make sure to secure the
floor mat.
uAn object or unsecured floor mat can interfere with your brake and accelerator
pedal operation while driving.
•If you have any animals on board, do not let them move around in the vehicle.
uThey may interfere with driving and a crash could occur.
•Securely close and lock all doors and the trunk.
2Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 93
•Adjust your seating position properly.
uAdjust the head restraint, too.
2Adjusting the Seats P. 116
2Adjusting the Head Restraints P. 118
•Adjust the mirrors and steering wheel properly for your driving.
uAdjust them while sitting in the proper driving position.
2Adjusting the Mirror P. 114
2Adjusting the Steering Wheel P. 113
■Interior Checks
1Interior Checks
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not
need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry
heavy items in the trunk or tow a trailer, have the
aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified
technician.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 183 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Driving
TOC
184
uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation
Driving
•Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the
seats.
uThey can interfere with the driver’s ability to operate the pedals, the operation
of the seats, or the operation of the sensors under the seats.
•Everyone in the vehicle must fasten their seat belt.
2Fastening a Seat Belt P. 29
•Make sure that the indicators in the instrument panel come on when you start the
vehicle, and go off soon after.
uAlways have a dealer check the vehicle if a problem is indicated.
2Indicators P. 64
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 184 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
185
uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit
Continued
Maximum Load Limit
1Maximum Load Limit
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR):
The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all accessories, all cargo, and the tongue
load.
2Specifications P. 304
P. 306
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR):
The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle axle.
2Specifications P. 304
P. 306
3
WARNING
Overloading or improper loading
can affect handling and stability
and cause a crash in which you
can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this manual.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 185 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Driving
TOC
The maximum load for your vehicle is 850 lbs (385 kg).
See Tire and Loading Information label attached to the driver's doorjamb.
This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and accessories,
and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit -
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,4000 lbs. and there
will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
Label Example
or XXX lbs.
be riding in your vehicle.
186
uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit
Driving
Load Limits Example
Example1
Max Load
850 lbs
(385 kg)
Passenger Weight
150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs
(68 kg x 2 = 136 kg)
Cargo Weight
550 lbs
(249 kg)
Example2
Max Load
850 lbs
(385 kg)
Passenger Weight
150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs
(68 kg x 5 = 340 kg)
Cargo Weight
100 lbs
(45 kg)
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 186 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, accessories, cargo, and
trailer tongue load must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or
the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the driver's doorjamb.
187
Continued
Towing a Trailer
Towing Preparation
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if you carefully observe the load limits, use the proper
equipment, and follow the towing guidelines. Check the load limits before driving.
■Total trailer weight
Maximum allowable weight of the trailer,
cargo, and everything in or on it must not
exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg). Towing loads in
excess of this can seriously affect vehicle
handling and performance and can damage
the engine and drivetrain.
■Tongue load
The weight of the tongue with a fully loaded
trailer on the hitch should be approximately
10% of the total trailer weight.
•Excessive tongue load reduces front tire
traction and steering control. Too little
tongue load can make the trailer unstable
and cause it to sway.
•To achieve a proper tongue load, start by
loading 60% of the load toward the front
of the trailer and 40% toward the rear.
Readjust the load as needed.
■Towing Load Limits
1Towing Load Limits
Check if all loads are within limits at a public scale.
If a public scale is not available, add the estimated
weight of your cargo load to the weight of your
trailer (as quoted by the manufacturer), and the
tongue load.
Break-in Period
Avoid towing a trailer during your vehicle’s first 600
miles (1,000 km).
Never exceed the gross weight ratings.
Gross weight information
2Vehicle Specifications P. 304
P. 306
3
WARNING
Exceeding any load limit or improperly
loading your vehicle and trailer can cause a
crash in which you can be seriously hurt or
killed.
Check the loading of your vehicle and
trailer carefully before starting to drive.
Total Load
Tongue Load
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 187 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Driving
TOC
uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation
188
Driving
Towing equipment varies by the size of your trailer, how much load you are towing,
and where you are towing.
■Hitches
The hitch must be of an approved type and properly bolted to the underbody.
■Safety chains
Always use safety chains when you tow a trailer. Leave enough slack to allow the
trailer to turn corners easily, but do not allow the chains to drag on the ground.
■Trailer brakes
There are two common types of trailer brakes: surge and electric. Surge brakes are
common for boat trailers, since the brakes will get wet. If you choose electric brakes,
be sure they are electronically actuated. Do not attempt to attach trailer brakes to
your vehicle’s hydraulic system, as it will lower braking effectiveness and create a
potential hazard.
■Additional towing equipment
Many states and provinces/territories require special outside mirrors when towing a
trailer. Even if mirrors are not required in your locale, you should install special
mirrors if visibility is restricted in any way.
■Trailer light
Trailer lights and equipment must comply with federal, state, province/territory, and
local regulations. Check with your local trailer sales or rental agency for the
requirements in the area where you plan to tow.
■Towing Equipment and Accessories
1Towing Equipment and Accessories
Make sure that all equipment is properly installed and
maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province/
territory, and local regulations.
Consult your trailer sales or rental agency if any other
items are recommended or required for your towing
situation.
The lighting and wiring of trailers can vary by type
and brand. If a connector is required, it should only
be installed by a qualified technician.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 188 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
189
uuTowing a TraileruDriving Safely with a Trailer
Continued
Driving Safely with a Trailer
•Have the trailer properly serviced and keep it in good condition.
•Make sure that all the weights and load in the vehicle and trailer are within limits.
2Towing Load Limits P. 187
•Securely attach the hitch, safety chains, and other necessary parts to the trailer.
•Securely store all the items in and on the trailer so that they do not shift while
driving.
•Check if the lights and brakes on the trailer are working properly.
•Check the pressures of the trailer tires, including the spare.
•Drive slower than normal.
•Obey posted speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
•Use the (D position when towing a trailer on level roads.
•Turn more slowly and with a wider turning arc than normal.
•Allow more time and distance for braking.
•Do not brake or turn suddenly.
■Things You Need To Know Before Towing a Trailer
■Towing Speeds and Gears
■Turning and Braking
1Driving Safely with a Trailer
Parking
In addition to the normal precautions, place wheel
chocks at each of the trailer’s tires.
Automatic transmission models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 189 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Driving
TOC
uuTowing a TraileruTowing Your Vehicle
190
Driving
•Monitor your temperature gauge. If it nears the red (Hot) mark, turn off the air
conditioning and reduce speed. Pull to the side of the road safely to cool down
the engine if necessary.
•Shift to the (S position if the transmission shifts frequently.
Towing Your Vehicle
Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motor home. If your vehicle needs
to be towed in an emergency, refer to the emergency towing information.
2Emergency Towing P. 299
■Driving in Hilly Terrain
1Driving in Hilly Terrain
If you use the paddle shifters when driving uphill and
downhill, select 3rd, 2nd, or 1st gear, depending on
the vehicle speed and road conditions. Do not use
4th and 5th gears.
If the automatic transmission fluid temperature
exceeds the specified limit, the transmission will also
automatically downshift to the 1st gear, even in the
sequential shift mode. The gear position indicator
blinks for a few seconds, then stays on.
Gear Position Speed Range
1st 0 - 42 mph (0 - 67 km/h)
2nd,3rd 19 - 62 mph (30 - 100 km/h)
Automatic transmission models
Automatic transmission models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 190 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
191
Continued
When Driving
Starting the Engine
1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
2. Check that the shift lever is in (P, then
depress the brake pedal.
uAlthough it is possible to start the vehicle
in (N, it is safer to start it in (P.
2. Check that the shift lever is in (N. Then
depress the brake pedal with your right
foot, and the clutch pedal with your left
foot.
uThe clutch pedal must be fully depressed
to start the engine.
1Starting the Engine
Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when
starting the engine.
The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in
thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400
meters).
When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories such as the lights, climate
control system, and rear defogger in order to reduce
battery drain.
If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold,
an engine block heater will improve starting and
warming of the engine. If temperatures consistently
below -22°F (-30°C) are expected, the coolant
mixture should be changed to a higher concentration
to prevent freezing. Consult a dealer for details.
If exhaust sounds abnormal or you can smell exhaust
gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle checked by a
dealer. There may be a problem with the engine or
exhaust system.
The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from
theft.
If an improperly coded device is used, the engine’s
fuel system is disabled.
2Immobilizer System P. 98
Brake Pedal
Automatic transmission models
Brake Pedal
Clutch Pedal
Manual transmission models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 191 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Driving
TOC
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
192
Driving
3. Turn the ignition switch to START (e
without depressing the accelerator pedal.
1. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, release the parking brake. Check that
the parking brake indicator has gone off.
2Parking Brake P. 210
2. Put the shift lever in (D. Select (R when reversing.
3. Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to
pull away.
1Starting the Engine
Do not hold the key in START (e for more than 15
seconds.
•If the engine does not start right away, wait for at
least 10 seconds before trying again.
•If the engine starts, but then immediately stops,
wait at least 10 seconds before repeating step 3
while gently depressing the accelerator pedal.
Release the accelerator pedal once the engine
starts.
The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from
theft. If an improperly coded key (or other device) is
used, the engine’s fuel system is disabled.
2Immobilizer System P. 98
■Starting to Drive
Automatic transmission models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 192 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
193
uuWhen DrivinguPrecautions While Driving
Precautions While Driving
Avoid driving in deep water and on flooded roads. This can damage the engine,
driveline, or cause electrical component failure.
If there is a strong impact with something under the vehicle, stop in a safe location.
Check the underside of the vehicle for damage or any fluid leaks.
■In Rain
■Other Precautions
1Precautions While Driving
NOTICE
Do not operate the shift lever while pressing the
accelerator pedal. You could damage the
transmission.
If the ignition switch is turned to ACCESSORY (q or
LOCK (0 while driving, the engine will shut down
and all steering and brake power assist functions will
stop, making it difficult to control the vehicle.
Do not put the shift lever in (N, as you will lose
engine braking (and acceleration) performance.
During the first 600 miles (1,000 km) of operation,
avoid sudden acceleration or full throttle operation so
as to not damage the engine or powertrain.
Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km).
You should also follow this when the brakes are
replaced.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 193 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Driving
TOC
194
uuWhen DrivinguAutomatic Transmission
Driving
Automatic Transmission
The following conditions cause the engine to run at high revolutions, and
•Immediately after the engine starts.
•When the climate control system is in use.
Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed when stopped.
Quickly depressing the accelerator pedal while driving uphill may cause the
transmission to drop to a lower gear, unexpectedly increasing vehicle speed. Depress
the accelerator pedal carefully, especially on slippery roads and curves.
■Creeping
■Kickdown
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 194 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
increasing creeping:
195
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Continued
Shifting
Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.
■Shift lever positions
Automatic transmission models
1Shifting
You cannot turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 and
remove the key unless the shift lever is in (P.
The vehicle may move forward very slightly even in
(N while the engine is cold.
Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary,
apply the parking brake.
Park
Used when parking or starting the
engine
Reverse
Used when reversing
Neutral
Used when idling
Drive
Used:
●For normal driving (gears change
between 1st and 5th automatically)
●When temporarily driving in the
sequential mode
Drive (S)
Used for:
●Automatically changing gears
between 1st and 4th (4th gear is used
only at high speed)
●Driving in the sequential mode
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 195 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Driving
TOC
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
196
Driving
■Shift Lever Operation
1Shift Lever Operation
NOTICE
When you change the shift lever from (D to (R and
vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the
brake pedal depressed.
Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come
to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.
Use the shift lever position indicator to check the
lever position before pulling away.
Whichever position the shift lever is in when driving,
a blinking (D indicator indicates a transmission
problem.
Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine
speeds in or over the tachometer’s red zone (engine
speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a
slight jolt.
It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the
brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release
button is held down.
Depress the brake pedal first.
Tachometer’s red zone
Shift Lever Position Indicator
Depress the brake pedal and
press the shift lever release button to
shift.
Shift without pressing the shift lever
release button.
Press the shift lever release button
and shift.
M (Sequential Shift mode) Indicator/
Gear Position Indicator
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 196 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
197
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Continued
Use the paddle shifters to change between 1st and 5th gears without removing
your hands from the steering wheel. The transmission will switch to the
sequential shift mode.
■When the shift lever is in (D:
The vehicle will go into the sequential shift mode momentarily, and the gear position
indicator will come on.
Once you start traveling at a constant speed, the sequential shift mode will
automatically switch off, and the gear position indicator will go off.
Hold the (+ paddle shifter for two seconds to return to normal drive.
■When the shift lever is in (S:
The vehicle will go into the sequential shift mode, and the M (sequential shift)
indicator and gear position indicator will come on. At speeds of 6 mph (10 km/h) or
less, the vehicle automatically shifts down into 1st gear. It will not automatically shift
up, even if vehicle speed increases.
You can only pull away in 1st or 2nd gear.
When switching out of the sequential shift mode, move the shift lever from (S to
(D. When the sequential shift mode is canceled, the sequential shift mode indicator
and shift indicator go off.
■Sequential Shift Mode
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 197 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Driving
TOC
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
198
Driving
■Second gear lock mode
If you pull the (+ paddle shifter while stopped or driving at 6 mph (10 km/h) or less,
the gear position will be locked in 2nd gear. This makes it easier to pull away on
slippery surfaces such as snow covered roads.
To cancel the 2nd gear lock mode, pull the (- paddle shifter, or move the shift lever
from (S to (D.
■Sequential Shift Mode Operation
1Sequential Shift Mode Operation
Each paddle shift operation makes a single gear
change.
To change gears continuously, release the paddle
shifter before pulling it again for the next gear.
Recommended Shift Points
Use this table as a guideline for efficient fuel
economy and effective emission control.
If the gear position indicator blinks when you try to
shift up or down, this means your vehicle speed is not
in its allowable gear shifting range.
Slightly accelerate to shift up and decelerate to shift
down while the indicator is blinking.
Shift Up Normal Acceleration
1st to 2nd 15 mph (24 km/h)
2nd to 3rd 25 mph (40 km/h)
3rd to 4th 40 mph (64 km/h)
4th to 5th 45 mph (72 km/h)
(- Paddle Shifter
(Shift down)
(+ Paddle Shifter
(Shift up)
Downshifting when pulling
the (- paddle shifter.
(Changes to a lower gear)
Upshifting when pulling
the (+ paddle shifter
(Changes to a higher gear)
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 198 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
199
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Continued
Shifting
Fully depress the clutch pedal to operate the shift lever and change gears, then
slowly release the pedal.
Depress the clutch pedal, and pause for a few seconds before shifting into (R,
When you are not shifting, do not rest your
foot on the clutch pedal. This can cause your
clutch to wear out faster.
■Shift Lever Operation
Manual transmission models
1Shifting
NOTICE
Do not shift to (R before the vehicle comes to a
complete stop.
Shifting to (R before stopping can damage the
transmission.
NOTICE
Before downshifting, make sure the engine will not
go into the tachometer’s red zone. Should this occur,
it can severely damage your engine.
There is a metallic part on the shift lever. If you leave
the vehicle parked outside for a long time on a hot
day, be careful before moving the shift lever. Because
of heat, the shift lever may be extremely hot. If the
outside temperature is low, the shift lever may feel
cold.
Recommended Shift Points
Driving in the highest gear that allows the engine to
run and accelerate smoothly helps to optimize fuel
economy and effective emissions control. The
following shift points are recommended:
If you exceed the maximum speed for the gear you
are in, the engine speed will enter into the
tachometer’s red zone. When this happens, you may
experience a slight jolt.
Shift Up Normal Acceleration
1st to 2nd 17 mph (27 km/h)
2nd to 3rd 29 mph (46 km/h)
3rd to 4th 37 mph (59 km/h)
4th to 5th 43 mph (69 km/h)
5th to 6th 49 mph (79 km/h)
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 199 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Driving
TOC
do not “grind.”
or shift into one of the forward gears for a moment. This stops the gears so they
200
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Driving
The manual transmission has a lockout mechanism that stops you from accidentally
shifting into (R from a forward gear while the vehicle is moving at a certain speed.
If you cannot shift to (R when the vehicle is stopped, do the following:
1. Depress the clutch pedal, move the shift
lever all the way to the left, and shift to (R.
2. If you still cannot shift into (R, apply the
parking brake, and turn the ignition switch
to ACCESSORY (q or LOCK (0.
3. Depress the clutch pedal and shift into (R.
4. Keep depressing the clutch pedal and start
the engine.
Have the vehicle checked by a dealer if you
have to go through this procedure repeatedly.
■Reverse Lockout
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 200 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
201
uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control
Continued
Cruise Control
Maintains a constant vehicle speed without having to keep your foot on the
accelerator. Use cruise control on freeways or open roads where you can travel at a
constant speed with little acceleration or deceleration.
1Cruise Control
It may not be possible to maintain a constant speed
when driving uphill or downhill.
3
WARNING
Improper use of the cruise control can lead
to a crash.
Use the cruise control only when traveling
on open highways in good weather.
■Shift positions for cruise control:
In (D or (S, in 2nd gear or
higher
When to use
Always keep sufficient distance
between you and the vehicle in
front of you.
Automatic transmission models
■Vehicle speed for cruise control:
Desired speed in a range above
roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~
How to use CRUISE MAIN is on in the
instrument panel.
Cruise control is ready to use.
■Press the CRUISE button on
the steering wheel.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 201 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Driving
TOC
uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control
202
Driving
Press the DECEL/SET button when you reach the desired speed using the
accelerator pedal.
The moment you release the DECEL/SET button, the set speed is fixed, and cruise
control begins. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on.
To cancel cruise control, do any of the
following:
•Press the CANCEL button.
•Press the CRUISE button.
•Depress the brake pedal.
•Depress the clutch pedal.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator goes off.
■To Set the Vehicle Speed
1To Set the Vehicle Speed
When not using cruise control:
Turn off cruise control by pressing the CRUISE
button.
■To Cancel
DECEL/SET Button
On when cruise control begins.
Press and Release
On
On
1To Cancel
Resuming the prior set speed:
After cruise control has been canceled, you can still
resume the prior set speed by pressing the RES/
ACCEL button while driving at a speed of at least 25
mph (40 km/h) or more.
You cannot set or resume in the following situations:
•When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h)
•When the CRUISE button is turned off
At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise
control is canceled automatically.
CRUISE Button
CANCEL Button
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 202 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
203
uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control
Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/ACCEL or DECEL/SET buttons
on the steering wheel.
•Each time you press the button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
•If you keep the button pressed, the vehicle speed increased or decreased by about
10 mph (16 km/h).
To cancel cruise control, do any of the
following:
•Press the CANCEL button.
•Press the CRUISE button.
•Depress the brake pedal.
•Depress the clutch pedal for five seconds
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator goes off.
■To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
You can set the vehicle speed using the DECEL/SET
button on the steering wheel when adjusting the
speed with the accelerator and brake pedals.
■To Cancel
To increase speed
To decrease speed
1To Cancel
Resuming the prior set speed:
After cruise control has been canceled, you can still
resume the prior set speed by pressing the RES/
ACCEL button while driving at a speed of at least 25
mph (40 km/h) or more.
You cannot set or resume in the following situations:
•When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h)
•When the CRUISE button is turned off
At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise
control is canceled automatically.
CRUISE Button
CANCEL Button
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 203 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Driving
TOC
or more.
204
uuWhen DrivinguVSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability Control), System
Driving
VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic
Stability Control), System
VSA® helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less
than what was intended. It also assists in maintaining traction on slippery surfaces.
It does so by regulating engine output and selectively applying the brakes.
When VSA® activates, you may notice that the
engine does not respond to the accelerator.
You may also notice some noise from the
hydraulic system. You will also see the
indicator blink.
■VSA® Operation
1VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability
Control), System
The VSA® may not function properly if tire type and
size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and
type of tire, and the air pressures as specified.
When the VSA® indicator comes on and stays on
while driving, there may be a problem with the
system. While this may not interfere with normal
driving, have your vehicle checked by a dealer
immediately.
VSA® cannot enhance stability in all driving situations
and does not control the entire braking system. You
still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate
for the conditions and always leave a sufficient
margin of safety.
The main function of the VSA® system is generally
known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The
system also includes a traction control function.
VSA® System
Indicator
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 204 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
205
uuWhen DrivinguVSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability Control), System
This button is on the driver side control panel.
To turn the VSA® system on and off, press and
hold it until you hear a beep.
VSA® will stop and the indicator will come on.
To turn it on again, press the (VSA® OFF)
button until you hear a beep.
VSA® is turned on every time you start the
engine, even if you turned it off the last time
you drove the vehicle.
■VSA® On and Off
1VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability
Control), System
Without VSA®, your vehicle will have normal braking
and cornering ability, but it will not have VSA®
traction and stability enhancement.
In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets
stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
to free it with the VSA® temporarily switched off.
When the VSA® system is off, the traction control
system is also off. You should only attempt to free
your vehicle with the VSA® off if you are not able to
free it when the VSA® is on.
Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to
switch VSA® on again. We do not recommend driving
your vehicle with the VSA® and traction control
systems switched off.
If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on or
blinks, the VSA® system comes on automatically. In
this case, you cannot turn the system off by pressing
the button.
You may hear a motor sound coming from the
engine compartment while system checks are being
performed immediately after starting the engine or
while driving. This is normal.
VSA® OFF
Indicator
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 205 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Driving
TOC
206
uuWhen DrivinguTPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
Driving
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
Monitors the tire pressure while you are driving. If your vehicle’s tire pressure
becomes significantly low, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on and a
message appears on the multi-information display.
To select the tire pressure monitor, turn the
ignition switch to ON (w and press the
(information) button until you see
the tire pressure screen.
If all the tire pressures are normal, TIRE
PRESSURE OK will be displayed.
To display the pressure of all four tires, press
the SEL/RESET button.
The pressure for each tire is displayed in PSI
(U.S.) or kPa (Canada).
■Tire Pressure Monitor
1TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
Conditions such as low ambient temperature and
altitude change directly affect tire pressure and can
trigger the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to come
on.
2If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator
Comes On or Blinks P. 293
1Tire Pressure Monitor
The pressure displayed on the multi-information
display can be slightly different from the actual
pressure as measured by a gauge. If there is a
significant difference between the two values, or if
the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator and the message
on the multi-information display do not go off after
you have inflated the tire to the specified pressure,
have the system checked by a dealer.
SYSTEM FUNCTION ERROR may appear if you drive
with the compact spare tire, or there is a problem
with the TPMS.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 206 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
207
uuWhen DrivinguTPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
If any tire has low pressure, LOW TIRE
PRESSURE is displayed on the multi-
information display. Check the pressure of
each tire by pressing the SEL/RESET button.
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE is displayed when a
tire has significantly low pressure. The specific
tire is displayed on the screen.
1TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
Tire pressure checked and inflated in:
•Warm weather can become under-inflated in
colder weather.
•Cold weather can become over-inflated in warmer
weather.
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator will not come
on as a result of over inflation.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 207 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Driving
TOC
208
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation
Driving
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) -
Required Federal Explanation
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 208 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when
cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped
with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of
your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop
and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
209
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 209 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Driving
TOC
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it
is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-
inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction
indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system
detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and
then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
210
Driving
Braking
Brake System
Use the parking brake to keep the vehicle stationary when parking.
To apply:
Pull the lever fully up without pressing the
release button.
To release:
1. Pull the lever slightly, and press and hold
the release button.
2. Lower the lever down all the way, then
release the button.
■Parking Brake
1Parking Brake
NOTICE
Release the parking brake fully before driving. The
rear brakes and axle can be damaged if you drive
with the parking brake applied.
If you start driving without fully releasing the parking
brake, a buzzer sounds as a warning, and RELEASE
PARKING BRAKE appears on the multi-information
display.
Always apply the parking brake when parking.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 210 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
211
uuBrakinguBrake System
Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. A vacuum power assist
helps reduce the effort needed on the brake pedal. The brake assist system increases
the stopping force when you depress the brake pedal hard in an emergency
situation. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering control when
braking very hard.
2Brake Assist System P. 213
2ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) P. 212
■Foot Brake
1Foot Brake
Check the brakes after driving through deep water,
or if there is a buildup of road surface water. If
necessary, dry the brakes by lightly depressing the
pedal several times.
If you hear a continuous metallic friction sound when
applying the brakes, the brake pads need to be
replaced. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
Constantly using the brake pedal while going down a
long hill builds up heat, which reduces the brake
effectiveness. Apply engine braking by taking your
foot off the accelerator pedal and downshifting to a
lower gear. With manual transmission use a lower
gear for greater engine braking.
Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving, as it will lightly apply the brakes and cause
them to lose effectiveness over time and reduce pad
life. It will also confuse drivers behind you.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 211 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Driving
TOC
212
uuBrakinguABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Driving
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by
pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than you.
The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also
balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading.
You should never pump the brake pedal. Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as
“stomp and steer.”
■ABS operation
The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is working. Keep holding the
pedal firmly down. On dry pavement, you will need to press on the brake pedal very
hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel the ABS activate immediately
if you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
When the vehicle speed goes under 6 mph (10 km/h), the ABS stops.
■ABS
1ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
NOTICE
The ABS may not function correctly if you use an
incorrect tire type and size.
When the ABS indicator comes on while driving,
there may be a problem with the system.
While normal braking is not affected, there is a
possibility of the ABS not operating. Have the vehicle
checked by a dealer immediately.
The ABS does not reduce the time or distance it takes
to stop the vehicle. It only helps with steering control
during hard braking.
In the following cases, your vehicle may need more
stopping distance than a vehicle without the ABS:
•When driving on rough road surfaces, including
when driving on uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow.
•When tire chains are installed.
You may hear a motor sound coming from the
engine compartment while system checks are being
performed immediately after starting the engine or
while driving. This is normal.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 212 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
213
uuBrakinguBrake Assist System
Brake Assist System
Designed to assist the driver by generating greater braking force when you depress
the brake pedal hard during emergency braking.
■Brake assist system operation
Press the brake pedal firmly for more powerful braking.
When brake assist operates, the pedal may wiggle slightly and an operating noise
may be heard. This is normal. Keep holding the brake pedal firmly down.
■Brake Assist System
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 213 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Driving
TOC
214
Driving
Parking Your Vehicle
When Stopped
1. Depress the brake pedal firmly.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Move the shift lever from (D to (P.
3. Move the shift lever to (R.
4. Turn off the engine.
Always set the parking brake firmly, in particular if you are parked on an incline.
1Parking Your Vehicle
Do not park your vehicle near flammable objects,
such as dry grass, oil, or timber.
Heat from the exhaust can cause a fire.
1When Stopped
NOTICE
The following can damage the transmission:
•Depressing the accelerator and brake pedals
simultaneously.
•Holding the vehicle in place when facing uphill by
depressing the accelerator pedal.
•Moving the shift lever into (P before the vehicle
stops completely.
Raise the wiper arms when snow is expected.
Automatic transmission models
Automatic transmission models
Manual transmission models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 214 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
215
Continued
Refueling
Fuel Information
■Fuel recommendation
Use of lower octane gasoline can cause occasional metallic knocking noise in the
engine and will result in decreased engine performance.
Use of gasoline with a pump octane less than 87 can lead to engine damage.
Your vehicle is designed to operate on premium unleaded gasoline with a pump
octane of 91 or higher.
If this octane grade is unavailable, regular unleaded gasoline with a pump octane of
87 or higher may be used temporally.
The use of regular unleaded gasoline can cause metallic knocking noises in the
engine and will result in decreased engine performance. The long-term use of
regular-grade gasoline can lead to engine damage.
■Top tier detergent gasoline
Because the level of detergency and additives in gasoline vary in the market, Acura
endorses the use of “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” where available to help
maintain the performance and reliability of your vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline meets a new gasoline standard jointly established by leading automotive
manufacturers to meet the needs of today’s advanced engines.
Qualifying gasoline retailers will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met
“TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” standards at the retail location. This fuel is
guaranteed to contain the proper level of detergent additives and be free of metallic
additives. The proper level of detergent additives, and absence of harmful metallic
additives in gasoline, help avoid build-up of deposits in your engine and emission
control system.
Unleaded premium gasoline, pump octane number 91 or higher
1Fuel Information
NOTICE
We recommend quality gasoline containing
detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and
engine deposits. In addition, in order to maintain
good performance, fuel economy, and emissions
control, we strongly recommend, the use of gasoline
that does NOT contain harmful manganese-based
fuel additives such as MMT, if such gasoline is
available.
Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely
affect performance, and cause the malfunction
indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on.
If this happens, contact a dealer for service.
4-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 215 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Driving
TOC
uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel
216
Driving
For further important fuel-related information for your vehicle, or on information on
gasoline that does not contain MMT, visit My Acura at owners.acura.com In
Canada, visit www.acura.ca for additional information on gasoline. For more
information on top tier gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.
■Gasoline containing ethanol
Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such as ethanol. Your vehicle is
designed to operate on oxygenated gasoline containing up to 10% ethanol by
volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol. If you notice any undesirable
operating symptoms, try another service station or switch to another brand of
gasoline.
■Fuel tank capacity: 18.5 US gal (70 liters)
How to Refuel
1. Stop your vehicle with the service
station pump on the left side of the vehicle
in the rear.
2. Turn off the engine.
3. Unlock the driver’s door using the master
door lock switch.
uThe fuel fill door on the outer side of the
vehicle will unlock.
1How to Refuel
3
WARNING
Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive.
You can be burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
•Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks,
and flame away.
•Handle fuel only outdoors.
•Wipe up spills immediately.
To Lock
To Unlock
Master Door Lock Switch
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 216 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
217
uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel
4. Press the area indicated by the arrow to
release the fuel fill door. You will hear a
click.
5. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly. If you hear a
release of air, wait until this stops, then turn
the knob slowly to open the fuel fill cap.
6. Place the fuel fill cap in the holder.
7. Insert the filler nozzle fully.
uWhen the tank is full, the fuel nozzle will
click off automatically. This leaves space
in the fuel tank in case the fuel expands
with a change in the temperature.
8. After filling, replace the fuel fill cap,
tightening it until you hear it click at
least once.
uShut the fuel fill door by hand.
1How to Refuel
Use the master door lock switch to unlock the fuel fill
door.
The vehicle doors and fuel fill door automatically
relock if the remote unlock function is used. This can
be deactivated by briefly opening then closing the
driver’s door.
NOTICE
The fuel fill door and its latching mechanism can be
permanently damaged if the fuel fill door is forced
closed when the driver’s door is locked.
The filler nozzle automatically stops to leave space in
the fuel tank so that fuel does not overflow as a result
of changes in air temperature.
If the fuel nozzle keeps turning off when the tank is
not full, there may be a problem with the pump’s fuel
vapor recovery system. Try filling at another pump. If
this does not fix the problem, consult a dealer.
Do not continue to add fuel after the nozzle has
automatically stopped. Additional fuel can exceed
the full tank capacity.
Fuel Fill Door
Press
Cap
Cap
Holder
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 217 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Driving
TOC
218
Driving
Fuel Economy
Improving Fuel Economy
Fuel economy depends on several conditions, including driving conditions, your
driving habits, the condition of your vehicle, and loading. Depending on these and
other conditions, you may or may not achieve the rated fuel economy of this vehicle.
You can optimize your fuel economy with proper maintenance of your vehicle.
Always maintain your vehicle in accordance with the messages displayed on the
multi-information display.
•Use the recommended viscosity engine oil, displaying the API Certification Seal.
•Maintain the specified tire pressure.
•Do not load the vehicle with excess cargo.
•Keep your vehicle clean. A buildup of snow or mud on your vehicle’s underside
adds weight and increases wind resistance.
■Maintenance and Fuel Economy
1Improving Fuel Economy
Direct calculation is the recommended method to
determine actual fuel consumed while driving.
In Canada, posted fuel economy numbers are
established following a simulated test. For more
information on how this test is performed, please visit
http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/
Miles driven Gallons of
fuel
Miles per
Gallon
100 Liter Kilometers L per 100 km
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 218 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
219
Accessories and Modifications
Accessories
When installing accessories, check the following:
•Do not install accessories on the windshield. They can obstruct your view and
delay your reaction to driving conditions.
•Do not install accessories on the side pillars or across the side windows.
Accessories installed in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the
side curtain airbags.
•Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits or interfere with
proper operation of your vehicle.
2Fuses P. 294
•Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact a dealer for
assistance. If possible, have a dealer inspect the final installation.
Modifications
Do not modify your vehicle or use non-Acura components that can affect its
handling, stability, and reliability.
Overall vehicle performance can be affected. Always make sure all equipment is
properly installed and maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province,
territory, and local regulations.
1Accessories and Modifications
Acura Genuine accessories are recommended to
ensure proper operation on your vehicle.
3
WARNING
Improper accessories or modifications can
affect your vehicle’s handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a crash in which
you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner’s
manual regarding accessories and
modifications.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 219 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Driving
TOC
220
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 220 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
221
Maintenance
This chapter discusses basic maintenance.
Before Performing Maintenance
Inspection and Maintenance ............ 222
Safety When Performing Maintenance...223
Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance
Service ........................................... 224
Maintenance MinderTM ..................... 225
Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood.. 229
Opening the Hood ........................... 231
Recommended Engine Oil ................ 234
Oil Check......................................... 235
Adding Engine Oil............................ 237
Engine Coolant................................ 240
Transmission Fluid............................ 242
Brake/Clutch Fluid............................ 244
Refilling Window Washer Fluid......... 246
Replacing Light Bulbs ....................... 247
Checking and Maintaining Wiper
Blades .......................................... 257
Checking and Maintaining Tires
Checking Tires ................................. 259
Tire and Loading Information Label .. 260
Tire Labeling .................................... 260
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)..262
Wear Indicators ............................... 264
Tire Service Life................................ 264
Tire and Wheel Replacement ........... 265
Tire Rotation.................................... 266
Winter Tires ..................................... 267
Battery............................................... 268
Remote Transmitter Care................. 269
Replacing the Battery....................... 269
Climate Control System Maintenance
..270
Cleaning
Interior Care .................................... 271
Exterior Care.................................... 273
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 221 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
222
Maintenance
Before Performing Maintenance
Inspection and Maintenance
For your safety, perform all listed inspections and maintenance to keep your vehicle
in good condition. If you become aware of any abnormality (noise, smell, insufficient
brake fluid, oil residue on the ground, etc.), have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
(Note, however, that service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in
effect.) Refer to the separate maintenance booklet for detailed maintenance and
inspection information.
■Daily inspections
Perform inspections before long distance trips, when washing the vehicle, or
when refueling.
■Periodic inspections
•Check the automatic transmission fluid level monthly.
2Automatic Transmission Fluid P. 242
•Check the brake fluid level monthly.
2Brake/Clutch Fluid P. 244
•Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects.
2Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 259
•Check the operation of the exterior lights monthly.
2Replacing Light Bulbs P. 247
•Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every six months.
2Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 257
■Types of Inspection and Maintenance
1Inspection and Maintenance
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of
emissions control devices and systems may be
done by any automotive repair establishment or
individuals using parts that are “certified” to
EPA standards.
According to state and federal regulations, failure to
perform maintenance on the maintenance main
items marked with # will not void your emissions
warranties. However, all maintenance services should
be performed in accordance with the intervals
indicated by the multi-information display.
2Maintenance Service Items P. 227
If you want to perform complex maintenance tasks
that require more skills and tools, purchase the
service manual.
2Authorized Manuals P. 315
If you want to perform maintenance yourself, make
sure that you have the necessary tools and skills first.
After performing maintenance, update the records in
the separate maintenance booklet.
U.S. models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 222 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
223
uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuSafety When Performing Maintenance
Safety When Performing Maintenance
Some of the most important safety precautions are given here.
However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you can decide whether or not you should perform
a given task.
•To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames
away from the battery and all fuel related parts.
Never leave rags, towels, or other flammable objects under the hood.
uHeat from the engine and exhaust can ignite them causing a fire.
•To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner,
•Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the battery or
compressed air.
•Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide, which is poisonous and can kill you.
uOnly operate the engine if there is sufficient ventilation.
•The vehicle must be in a stationary condition.
uMake sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and
the engine is off.
•Be aware that hot parts can burn you.
uMake sure to let the engine and exhaust system cool thoroughly before
touching vehicle parts.
•Be aware that moving parts can injure you.
uDo not start the engine unless instructed, and keep your hands and limbs away
from moving parts.
■Maintenance Safety
■Vehicle Safety
1Safety When Performing Maintenance
3
WARNING
Improperly maintaining this vehicle or
failing to correct a problem before driving
can cause a crash in which you can be
seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection and
maintenance recommendations according
to the schedules in this owner’s manual.
3
WARNING
Failure to properly follow maintenance
instructions and precautions can cause you
to be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures and
precautions in this owner’s manual.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 223 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Maintenance
TOC
not gasoline.
224
uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuParts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
Maintenance
Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
The use of Acura genuine parts and fluids is recommended when maintaining and
servicing your vehicle. Acura genuine parts are manufactured according to the same
high quality standards used in Acura vehicles.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 224 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
225
Continued
Maintenance MinderTM
If the engine oil life is less than 15%, you will see the Maintenance Minder messages
appear on the multi-information display every time you turn the ignition switch to
ON (w. The messages notify you when to change the engine oil, or when to bring
your vehicle to a dealer for indicated maintenance services.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w.
2. Press the SEL/RESET button repeatedly until the engine oil life appears on the
multi-information display.
The system message indicator ( ) comes on along with the Maintenance
■Displaying the Engine Oil Life
1Displaying the Engine Oil Life
Based on the engine operating conditions, the
remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed
as a percentage.
Displayed Engine Oil
Life (%)
Calculated Engine Oil
Life (%)
100 100 to 91
90 90 to 81
80 80 to 71
70 70 to 61
60 60 to 51
50 50 to 41
40 40 to 31
30 30 to 21
20 20 to 16
15 15 to 11
10 10 to 6
55 to 1
00
SEL/RESET
Button
Maintenance
Service Items
Remaining
Engine Oil Life
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 225 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Maintenance
TOC
Minder message.
226
uuMaintenance MinderTMu
Maintenance
■Maintenance Minder Messages on the Multi-Information Display
Maintenance Message Oil Life Display Explanation Information
SERVICE DUE SOON 15% The remaining engine oil life is 15 to 6
percent. Once you switch the display
by pressing the (Information)
button this message will go off.
The engine oil is approaching the
end of its service life, and the
maintenance items should be
inspected and serviced soon.
SERVICE DUE NOW 5% The remaining engine oil life is 5 to 1
percent. Press the button to
switch to another display.
The engine oil has almost reached
the end of its service life, and the
maintenance items should be
inspected and serviced as soon as
possible.
SERVICE PAST DUE Negative Distance The remaining engine oil life has
passed its service life, and a negative
distance appears after driving over 10
miles (U.S. models) or 10 km
(Canadian models). Press the
button to switch to another display.
The engine oil life has passed.
The maintenance items must be
inspected and serviced immediately.
U.S. Canada
U.S.
Canada
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 226 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
227
uuMaintenance MinderTMu
Continued
■Maintenance Service Items
1Maintenance Service Items
•Independent of the Maintenance Minder
information, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.
•Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000
km).
•Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if
they are noisy.
Maintenance Minder Message
System Message
Indicator
Sub ItemsMain Items
*1: If message, SERVICE DUE NOW does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset,
change the engine oil every year.
*2: If you drive primarily in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000
km).
*3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
CODE Maintenance Main Items
A●Replace engine oil*1
B●Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter
●Inspect front and rear brakes
●Check parking brake adjustment
●Inspect tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
●Inspect suspension components
●Inspect driveshaft boots
●Inspect brake hoses and lines (Including ABS)
●Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids
●Inspect exhaust system#
●Inspect fuel lines and connections#*4: Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailer towing results in higher transmission
temperatures. This requires transmission fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the
Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission
fluid changed at 60,000 miles (100,000 km), then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km). (For A/T only.)
*5: If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over 110°F, 43 °C), in very low temperatures (under
-20°F, -29°C), or tow a trailer, replace every 60,000 miles/100,000 km. (6-cylinder models only)
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty.
CODE Maintenance Sub Items
1●Rotate tires
2●Replace air cleaner element*2
●Replace dust and pollen filter*3
●Inspect drive belt
3●Replace transmission fluid*4
4●Replace spark plugs
●Replace timing belt and inspect water pump*5
●Inspect valve clearance
5●Replace engine coolant
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 227 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Maintenance
TOC
uuMaintenance MinderTMu
228
Maintenance
Reset the engine oil life display if you have performed the maintenance service.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w.
2. Display the engine oil life by repeatedly pressing the SEL/RESET button.
3. Press and hold the SEL/RESET button for 10 seconds or more.
uThe oil life reset mode is displayed on the multi-information display.
4. Select RESET with the button.
uThe service code will disappear and the engine oil life display will return
To cancel the oil life reset mode, select CANCEL, then press the SEL/RESET button.
■Resetting the Display
1Resetting the Display
NOTICE
Failure to reset the engine oil life after a maintenance
service results in the system showing incorrect
maintenance intervals, which can lead to serious
mechanical problems.
The dealer will reset the engine oil life display after
completing the required maintenance service. If
someone other than a dealer performs maintenance
service, reset the engine oil life display yourself.
Maintenance
Item Codes
Engine Oil Life
SEL/RESET Button
(Information)
Button
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 228 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
to 100%.
229
Continued
Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood
4-cylinder models
Brake Fluid
Engine Coolant
Reservoir
Radiator Cap
Washer Fluid
(Blue Cap)
Engine Oil Dipstick
(Orange Handle)
Clutch Fluid
(Light Gray Cap)
Manual transmission models
Engine Oil Fill Cap
Automatic Transmission
Fluid Dipstick
(Yellow Loop)
Automatic transmission models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 229 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Maintenance
TOC
(Black Cap)
230
uuMaintenance Under the HooduMaintenance Items Under the Hood
Maintenance
6-cylinder models
Engine Oil Dipstick
(Orange Loop)
Washer Fluid
(Blue Cap)
Engine Coolant
Reservoir*
Radiator Cap*
Brake Fluid
(Black Cap)
Engine Oil Fill Cap
Automatic Transmission
Fluid Dipstick
(Yellow Loop)
*: Located under the cover
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 230 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
231
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood
Continued
Opening the Hood
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and set
the parking brake.
2. Pull the hood release handle under the
lower left corner of the dashboard.
uThe hood will pop up slightly.
3. Push up the hood latch lever in the center
of the hood to release the lock mechanism,
and open the hood.
4. Remove the support rod from the clamp
using the grip. Mount the support rod in
the hood.
When closing, remove the support rod, and
stow it in the clamp, then gently lower the
hood. Remove your hand at a height of
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and let the
hood close.
1Opening the Hood
NOTICE
Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are
raised.
The hood will strike the wipers, and may damage
either the hood or the wipers.
When closing the hood, check that the hood is
securely latched.
If the hood latch lever moves stiffly, or if you can
open the hood without lifting the lever, the latch
mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated.
Hood Release Handle
Pull
Lever
Support Rod
Grip
Clamp
4-cylinder models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 231 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Maintenance
TOC
232
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood
Maintenance
4. Lift the hood up most of the way.
uThe hydraulic supports will lift it up the
rest of the way and hold it up.
When closing, lower it to approximately 12
inches (30 cm), then press down firmly with
your hands.
6-cylinder models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 232 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
233
uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Compartment Covers*
Engine Compartment Covers*
The component parts in the engine compartment are protected by three covers.
You may need to remove the covers when you perform certain maintenance work.
To remove the covers:
1Engine Compartment Covers*
Insert a flat-tip screwdriver, lift and remove the
central pin to remove the clip.
Insert the clip with the central pin raised, and push
until it is flat.
Push until the
pin is flat
Right Engine Compartment Cover
Remove the holding clips
Left Engine Compartment Cover
Remove the holding clips
Bulkhead Cover Remove the holding clips
* Not available on all models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 233 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Maintenance
TOC
234
uuMaintenance Under the HooduRecommended Engine Oil
Maintenance
Recommended Engine Oil
Oil is a major contributor to your engine’s
performance and longevity. If you drive the
vehicle with insufficient or deteriorated oil,
the engine may fail or be damaged.
This seal indicates the oil is energy conserving
and that it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
Use Genuine Acura Motor Oil or another
commercial engine oil of suitable viscosity for
the ambient temperature as shown below.
■Synthetic oil
You may also use synthetic motor oil if it is labeled with the API Certification Seal
and is the specified viscosity grade.
•Genuine Acura Motor Oil
•Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil with an API Certification Seal on the
container.
1Recommended Engine Oil
Engine Oil Additives
Your vehicle does not require oil additives. In fact,
they may adversely affect the engine performance
and durability.
Ambient Temperature
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 234 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
235
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check
Continued
Oil Check
We recommend that you check the engine oil level every time you refuel.
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Wait approximately three minutes after turning the engine off before you check
the oil.
1. Remove the dipstick (orange handle).
1. Remove the dipstick (orange loop).
2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth or
paper towel.
3. Insert the dipstick back all the way into
its hole.
1Oil Check
If the oil level is near or below the lower mark, slowly
add oil being careful not to overfill.
6-cylinder models
4-cylinder models
4-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
All models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 235 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Maintenance
TOC
236
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check
Maintenance
4. Remove the dipstick again, and check the
level. It should be between the upper and
lower marks. Add oil if necessary.
Upper Mark
Lower Mark
4-cylinder models
Upper Mark
Lower Mark
6-cylinder models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 236 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
237
uuMaintenance Under the HooduAdding Engine Oil
Adding Engine Oil
1. Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap.
2. Add oil slowly.
3. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and tighten
it securely.
4. Wait for three minutes and recheck the
engine oil dipstick.
1Adding Engine Oil
If any oil spills, wipe it up immediately. Spilled oil may
damage the engine compartment components.
NOTICE
Do not fill the engine oil above the upper mark.
Overfilling the engine oil can result in leaks and
engine damage.
Engine Oil Fill Cap
4-cylinder models
Engine Oil Fill Cap
6-cylinder models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 237 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Maintenance
TOC
238
uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
Maintenance
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
You must change the engine oil and oil filter regularly in order to maintain the
engine’s lubrication. The engine may be damaged if they are not changed regularly.
Change the oil and filter in accordance with the maintenance message on the multi-
information display.
1. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature, and then turn the
engine off.
2. Open the hood and remove the engine oil
fill cap.
3. Remove the bolts on the undercarriage
and remove the under cover.
4. Remove the drain bolt and washer from
the bottom of the engine, and drain the
oil into a suitable container.
5. Remove the oil filter and dispose of the
remaining oil.
1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
NOTICE
You may damage the environment if you do not
dispose of the oil in a suitable way. If you are
changing the oil by yourself, appropriately dispose of
the used oil. Put the oil in a sealed container and take
it to a recycling center. Do not throw the oil away
into a garbage can or onto the ground.
Under CoverBolt
4-cylinder models
4-cylinder models
Drain Bolt
Washer
4-cylinder models
All models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 238 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
6. Check that the filter gasket is not stuck to
the engine contact surface.
uIf it is stuck, you must detach it.
239
uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
7. Wipe away dirt and dust adhering to the
contact surface of the engine block, and
install a new oil filter.
8. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then
reinstall the drain bolt.
uTightening torque:
29 lbf∙ft (39 N∙m,
4.0 kgf∙m)
9. Pour the recommended engine oil into
the engine.
uEngine oil change capacity (including
filter):
4.2 US qt (4.0 L)
4.5 US qt (4.3 L)
10. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap securely
and start the engine.
11. Run the engine for a few minutes, and
then check that there is no leak from the
drain bolt or oil filter.
12. Stop the engine, wait for three
minutes, and then check the oil level on
the dipstick.
uIf necessary, add more engine oil.
1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
You will need a special wrench to replace the oil
filter. You can buy this wrench from a dealer.
When installing the new oil filter follow the
instructions supplied with the oil filter.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine.
The low oil pressure indicator should go off within
five seconds. If it does not, turn off the engine, and
check your work.
6-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
4-cylinder models
Washer
Drain Bolt
Oil Filter
Oil Filter
4-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 239 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Maintenance
TOC
240
uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant
Maintenance
Engine Coolant
This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any
straight antifreeze or water.
We recommend you check the engine coolant level every time you refuel. Check the
reserve tank first. If it is completely empty, also check the coolant level in the
radiator. Add the engine coolant accordingly.
1. Remove the right-side engine
compartment cover.
2Engine Compartment Covers P. 233
2. Check the amount of coolant in the
reserve tank.
3. If the coolant level is below the MIN mark,
add the specified coolant until it reaches
the MAX mark.
4. Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
Specified coolant: Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2
■Reserve Tank
1Engine Coolant
NOTICE
If temperatures consistently below -22°F (-30°C) are
expected, the coolant mixture should be changed to
a higher concentration. Consult a dealer for more
information.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may
use another major brand non-silicate coolant as a
temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality
coolant recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result
in corrosion, causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed
and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.
Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your
vehicle’s cooling system. They may not be compatible
with the coolant or with the engine components.
4-cylinder models
Reserve Tank
MAX MIN
6-cylinder models
All models
Reserve Tank
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 240 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
241
uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant
1. Remove the radiator cap cover.
2. Make sure the engine and radiator
are cool.
3. Turn the radiator cap counterclockwise and
relieve any pressure in the coolant system.
Do not push the cap down when turning.
4. Push down and turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise to remove it.
5. The coolant level should be up to the base
of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low.
6. Put the radiator cap back on, and tighten
7. Pour coolant into the reserve tank until it
reaches the MAX mark. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
■Radiator
1Radiator
NOTICE
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill
any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can
damage components in the engine compartment.
3
WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the
engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray
out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool
down before removing the radiator cap.
Radiator Cap
6-cylinder models
All models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 241 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Maintenance
TOC it fully.
242
uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid
Maintenance
Transmission Fluid
Check the fluid level when the engine is at normal operating temperature.
1. Park on level ground, and start the engine.
2. Wait until the radiator fan starts and then
turn off the engine.
uPerform step 3 after waiting for about 60
seconds (less than 90 seconds).
3. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) from the
transmission and wipe it with a clean cloth.
4. Insert the dipstick all the way back into
the transmission securely, as shown in
image.
5. Remove the dipstick and check the
fluid level.
uIt should be between the upper and
lower marks in the HOT range.
6. If the level is below the lower mark,
add fluid into the dipstick hole to bring it
to the level between the upper and lower
marks, and have your vehicle checked by
a dealer immediately.
■Automatic Transmission Fluid
Specified fluid: Acura ATF DW-1 (automatic transmission fluid)
1Automatic Transmission Fluid
NOTICE
Do not mix Acura ATF DW-1 with other
transmission fluids.
Using a transmission fluid other than Acura ATF
DW-1 may adversely affect the operation and
durability of your vehicle’s transmission, and damage
the transmission.
Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that
is not equivalent to Acura ATF DW-1 is not covered
by Acura’s new vehicle warranty.
NOTICE
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill
any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can
damage components in the engine compartment.
Upper Mark
Lower Mark
HOT
Range
Upper
Lower
Marks
Rubber
Cap
Guide
4-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 242 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
the
243
uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid
Check the fluid level when the engine is at normal operating temperature.
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
2. Remove the bolts with a wrench, then
carefully remove the under cover.
3. Remove the transmission filler bolt and
washer. Carefully feel inside the bolt hole
with your fingers.
uCheck if the fluid level is up to the edge
of the bolt hole.
4. If the fluid level is not up to the edge of the
bolt hole, add Acura Manual Transmission
Fluid (MTF) until it runs out of the hole.
5. Put a new washer on the filler bolt, then
reinstall the filler bolt.
uTightening torque:
33 lbf∙ft (44 N∙m, 4.5 kgf∙m)
6. Reinstall the under cover with the bolts.
■Manual Transmission Fluid
Specified fluid: Acura Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF)
1Manual Transmission Fluid
If Acura MTF is not available, you may use the API
certificated SAE 0W-20 or 5W-20 viscosity motor oil
as a temporary measure.
Replace with MTF as soon as possible. Motor oil does
not contain the proper additives for the transmission
and continued use can cause decreased shifting
performance and lead to transmission damage.
Under Cover
Bolt
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 243 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Maintenance
TOC
244
uuMaintenance Under the HooduBrake/Clutch Fluid
Maintenance
Brake/Clutch Fluid
Use the same fluid for both the brakes and clutch.
The fluid level should be between the MIN
and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir.
Specified fluid: Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
■Checking the Brake Fluid
1Brake/Clutch Fluid
NOTICE
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your
vehicle’s braking system and can cause extensive
damage.
If the specified brake fluid is not available, you should
use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid from a sealed
container as a temporary replacement.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion
and decrease the longevity of the system. Have the
brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy
Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible.
If the brake fluid level is at or below the MIN mark,
have a dealer inspect for leaks or worn brake pads as
soon as possible.
Brake
Reservoir
MIN
MAX
4-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
Brake
Reservoir
MAX
MIN
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 244 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
245
uuMaintenance Under the HooduBrake/Clutch Fluid
The fluid level should be between the MIN
and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir.
■Checking the Clutch Fluid
1Checking the Clutch Fluid
If the clutch fluid level is at or below the MIN mark,
have a dealer inspect for leaks or an excessively worn
clutch plate as soon as possible.
Clutch Reservoir
MIN
MAX
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 245 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Maintenance
TOC
246
uuMaintenance Under the HooduRefilling Window Washer Fluid
Maintenance
Refilling Window Washer Fluid
Check the amount of window washer fluid using the washer fluid level gauge on
the cap.
If the level is low, fill the washer reservoir.
1Refilling Window Washer Fluid
NOTICE
Do not use engine antifreeze or a vinegar/water
solution in the windshield washer reservoir.
Antifreeze can damage your vehicle’s paint. A
vinegar/water solution can damage the windshield
washer pump.
Level Gauge
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 246 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
247
Continued
Replacing Light Bulbs
Headlight Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Remove all the engine compartment covers.
2Engine Compartment Covers* P. 233
2. Remove the engine coolant reservoir.
High beam headlight: 60 W (HB3)
Low beam headlight: 55 W (H1 for halogen bulb Type)
35 W (D2S for high voltage discharge type)
■High Beam Headlight
1Headlight Bulbs
NOTICE
Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit.
Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause
the bulb to overheat and shatter.
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not
need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry
heavy items in the trunk or tow a trailer, have the
aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified
technician.
The HB3 and H1 types are halogen bulbs.
When replacing a bulb, handle it by its base, and
protect the glass from contact with your skin or hard
objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with
denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.
Engine Coolant Reservoir
4-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
Passenger side
All models
6-cylinder models
Engine Coolant Reservoir
* Not available on all models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 247 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Maintenance
TOC
uuReplacing Light BulbsuHeadlight Bulbs
248
Maintenance
3. Remove the fasteners, using a flat-tip
screwdriver. Remove the cover of the air
intake duct and its upper part.
3. Remove the fasteners, and remove the air
intake duct cover.
1Headlight Bulbs
The exterior lights’ inside lenses (headlights, brake
lamps, etc.) may fog temporarily after a car wash or
while driving in the rain. This does not impact the
exterior light function.
However, if you see a large amount of water or ice
accumulated inside the lenses, have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer.
4-cylinder models
Fastener
Cover
Air Intake
Duct
Driver side
4-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
Fastener
Cover
6-cylinder models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 248 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
249
uuReplacing Light BulbsuHeadlight Bulbs
Continued
4. Remove the coupler.
uIt can be removed by pushing the tab.
5. Rotate the old bulb to the left to remove.
6. Insert a new bulb into the headlight
assembly and turn it to the right.
7. Insert the coupler into the connector of
4-cylinder models
Bulb
Coupler
Tab
6-cylinder models
Bulb
Tab
Coupler
Driver and passenger side
All models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 249 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Maintenance
TOC
the bulb.
uuReplacing Light BulbsuHeadlight Bulbs
250
Maintenance
High voltage can remain in the circuit for a long period of time after the light is
switched off. Do not attempt to inspect or replace the high voltage discharge type
bulbs yourself. Ask a dealer to inspect and replace low beam headlights.
1. Turn the steering wheel all the way to
the opposite side from the headlight
being replaced.
Passenger side: Turn the steering wheel
to the left.
Driver side: Turn the steering wheel to
the right.
2. Remove the holding clips and screws, and
pull the inner fender back.
3. Rotate the cover to the left, and remove.
■Low Beam Headlights
■Low Beam Headlights
High Voltage Discharge Types
Halogen Types
1Low Beam Headlights
Insert a flat-tip screwdriver, lift and remove the
central pin to remove the clip.
Inner Fender
Cover
Screw
Clip
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 250 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
Continued 251
uuReplacing Light BulbsuFog Light Bulbs
4. Unhook the hook, and pull out
5. Remove the old bulb and insert the
new bulb.
6. Put the connector back into the
Fog Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Remove the clips using a flat-tip
screwdriver, and lower the under cover.
1Low Beam Headlights
Insert the clip with the central pin raised, and push
until it is flat.
Push until the
pin is flat
Hook
Bulb
Connector
Fog Light: 55 W
1Fog Light Bulbs
NOTICE
Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration,
or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to
overheat and shatter.
The fog lights are halogen bulbs.
When replacing a bulb, handle it by its plastic case,
and protect the glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with
denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.
Clip
Under Cover
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 251 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Maintenance
TOC
the connector.
headlight assembly.
252
uuReplacing Light BulbsuFront Turn Signal/Parking/Side Marker Light Bulbs
Maintenance
2. Remove the coupler.
uIt can be removed by pushing the tab.
3. Rotate the old bulb to the left to remove.
4. Insert a new bulb into the fog light
assembly and turn it to the right.
5. Insert the coupler into the connector of
the bulb.
Front Turn Signal/Parking/Side Marker Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Turn the steering wheel and pull the inner fender back in the same way as when
replacing the low beam headlights.
2Changing the Low Beam Headlight P. 250
1. Turn the socket to the left and remove it.
2. Push in the old bulb, rotate to the left until
it unlocks, and remove.
3. Insert a new bulb.
Bulb
Coupler
Tab
Front Turn Signal/Parking/Side Marker: 21/5W
Socket
Bulb
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 252 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
253
uuReplacing Light BulbsuSide Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Light Bulbs
Continued
Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Light Bulbs
Door mirrors have the side turn lights. Have an authorized Acura dealer inspect and
replace the light bulbs.
Brake Light, Taillight, Rear Turn Signal Light and
Rear Side Marker Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Pull out and remove the cover.
Brake/Taillight: 21/5 W
Rear Turn Signal Light: 21 W
Rear Side Marker Light: 3 CP
Cover
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 253 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Maintenance
TOC
254
uuReplacing Light BulbsuBack-Up Light Bulbs
Maintenance
2. Turn the socket to the left and remove it.
Remove the old bulb.
3. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
Back-Up Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Remove the clip in the trunk using a
flat-tip screwdriver.
2. Pull out the lining.
Back-Up Light: 21 W
Lining
Clip
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 254 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
255
uuReplacing Light BulbsuRear License Plate Light Bulbs
3. Turn the socket to the left and remove.
4. Remove the old bulb and insert the
Rear License Plate Light Bulbs
Have an authorized Acura dealer inspect and replace the light bulbs.
Lining
Clip
Socket
Bulb
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 255 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Maintenance
TOC
new bulb.
256
uuReplacing Light BulbsuHigh-Mount Brake Light Bulbs
Maintenance
High-Mount Brake Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Turn the socket to the left and remove it.
3. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
High-Mount Brake Light: 21 W
Bulb
Socket
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 256 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
257
Continued
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades
Checking Wiper Blades
If the wiper blade rubber has deteriorated, it will leave streaks and the metal wiper
arm may scratch the window glass.
Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber
1. Lift the driver side wiper arm first, then the
passenger side.
2. Place a cloth on the edge of the lock
tab. Push the lock tab up with a flat-tip
screw driver.
3. Slide the blade from the wiper arm.
1Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber
NOTICE
Avoid dropping the wiper arm; it may damage the
windshield.
Lock Tab
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 257 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Maintenance
TOC
258
uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Wiper Blade Rubber
Maintenance
4. Slide the wiper blade out from its holder by
pulling the tabbed end out.
5. Remove the retainers from the rubber blade
that has been removed, and mount to a
new rubber blade.
uCorrectly align the rubber protrusion and
the retainer grooves.
6. Slide the new wiper blade onto the holder
from the bottom end.
uThe tab on the holder should fit in the
indent of the wiper blade.
7. Slide the wiper blade onto the wiper arm,
then push down the lock tab.
8. Lower the passenger side wiper arm first,
then the driver side.
Blade
Top Retainer
Blade
Tab
Indent
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 258 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
259
Checking and Maintaining Tires
Checking Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be of the proper type and size, in
good condition with adequate tread, and properly inflated.
■Inflation guidelines
Properly inflated tires provide the best combination of handling, tread life, and comfort.
Refer to the driver’s doorjamb label or specification’s page for the specified pressure.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and
are more likely to fail from overheating.
Overinflated tires make your vehicle ride harshly, are more prone to road hazards,
and wear unevenly.
Every day before you drive, look at each of the tires. If one looks lower than the
others, check the pressure with a tire gauge.
At least once a month or before long trips, use a gauge to measure the pressure in
all tires, including the spare. Even tires in good condition can lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to
20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm2) per month.
■Inspection guidelines
Every time you check inflation, also examine the tires and valve stems.
Look for:
•Bumps or bulges on the side or in the tread. Replace the tire if you find any cuts,
splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace it if you see fabric or cord.
•Remove any foreign objects and inspect for air leaks.
•Uneven tread wear. Have a dealer check the wheel alignment.
•Excessive tread wear.
2Wear Indicators P. 264
•Cracks or other damage around valve stem.
1Checking Tires
Measure the air pressure when tires are cold. This
means the vehicle has been parked for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). If
necessary, add or release air until the specified
pressure is reached.
If checked when hot, tire pressure can be as much as
4–6 psi (30–40 kPa, 0.3–0.4 kgf/cm2) higher than if
checked when cold.
Have a dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent
vibration while driving. New tires and any that have
been removed and reinstalled should be properly
balanced.
3
WARNING
Using tires that are excessively worn or
improperly inflated can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner’s
manual regarding tire inflation and
maintenance.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 259 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Maintenance
TOC
260
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Loading Information Label
Maintenance
Tire and Loading Information Label
The label attached to the driver’s doorjamb provides necessary tire and
loading information.
Tire Labeling
The tires that came on your vehicle have a
number of markings. Those you should be
aware of are described below.
Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size.
1Tire and Loading Information Label
The tire and loading information label attached to the
driver’s doorjamb contains:
aThe number of people your vehicle can carry.
bThe total weight your vehicle can carry. Do not
exceed this weight.
cThe original tire sizes for front, rear and spare.
dThe proper cold tire pressure for front, rear and
spare.
Label Example
Example Tire Size
Tire
Identification
Number (TIN)
Maximum
Tire Load
Maximum
Tire Pressure
Tire Size
■Tire Sizes
1Tire Sizes
Following is an example of tire size with an
explanation of what each component means.
P225/50 R17 93V
P: Vehicle type (P indicates passenger vehicle).
225: Tire width in millimeters.
50: Aspect ratio (the tire’s section height as a
percentage of its width).
R: Tire construction code (R indicates radial).
17: Rim diameter in inches.
93: Load index (a numerical code associated with the
maximum load the tire can carry).
V: Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 260 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
the maximum speed rating).
261
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Labeling
The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like
the example in the side column. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire.
Cold Tire Pressure – The tire air pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at
least three hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Load Rating – Means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given
inflation pressure.
Maximum Inflation Pressure – The maximum tire air pressure that the tire
Maximum Load Rating – Means the load rating for a tire at the maximum
permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Recommended Inflation Pressure – The cold tire inflation pressure recommended
by the manufacturer.
Treadwear Indicators (TWI) – Means the projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread.
■Tire Identification Number (TIN)
■Glossary of Tire Terminology
1Tire Identification Number (TIN)
DOT B97R FW6X 2209
DOT: This indicates that the tire meets all
requirements of the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
B97R: Manufacturer’s identification mark.
FW6X: Tire type code.
22 09: Date of manufacture.
Year
Week
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 261 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Maintenance
TOC
can hold.
262
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Maintenance
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
1Uniform Tire Quality Grading
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 262 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
■Uniform Tire Quality Grading
■Treadwear
The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety Requirements. All tires are
also graded for treadwear, traction, and temperature performance according to
Department of Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains
these gradings.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread
houlder and maximum section width.
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test
course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2)
times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
For example:
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal
Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.
263
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
■Traction
■Temperature
1Traction
1Temperature
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 263 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Maintenance
TOC
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphat and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heate when
te sted under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test
wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which
all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on
the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is
abased on straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation,
or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
264
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWear Indicators
Maintenance
Wear Indicators
The groove where the wear indicator is
located is 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) shallower than
elsewhere on the tire. If the tread has worn so
that the indicator is exposed, replace the tire.
Worn out tires have poor traction on
wet roads.
Tire Service Life
The life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including driving habits, road
conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and
environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use).
In addition to regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is
recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five
years old. All tires, including the spare, should be removed from service after 10
years from the date of manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear.
Example of a Wear
Indicator mark
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 264 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
265
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Wheel Replacement
Tire and Wheel Replacement
Replace your tires with radials of the same size, load range, speed rating, and
maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tire’s sidewall). Using tires of a
different size or construction can cause the ABS and VSA® (vehicle stability assist)
system to work incorrectly.
It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that isn’t possible, replace the
front or rear tires in pairs.
Make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels.
If you replace a wheel, only use TPMS specified wheels approved for your vehicle.
1Tire and Wheel Replacement
3
WARNING
Installing improper tires on your vehicle can
affect handling and stability. This can cause
a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or
killed.
Always use the size and type of tires
recommended in this owner’s manual.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 265 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Maintenance
TOC
266
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Rotation
Maintenance
Tire Rotation
Rotating tires according to the maintenance messages on the multi-information
display helps to distribute wear more evenly and increase tire life.
■Tires without rotation marks
Rotate the tires as shown here.
■Tires with rotation marks
Rotate the tires as shown here.
1Tire Rotation
Tires with directional tread patterns should only be
rotated front to back (not from one side to the other).
Directional tires should be mounted with the rotation
indication mark facing forward, as shown below.
Front
Direction Mark
Front
Front
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 266 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
267
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWinter Tires
Winter Tires
If driving on snowy or frozen roads, mount all season marked “M+S” tires, snow
tires, or tire chains; reduce speed; and maintain sufficient distance between vehicles
when driving.
Be particularly careful when operating the steering wheel or brakes to
prevent skidding.
Use tire chains, snow tires, or all season tires when necessary or according to the law.
When mounting, refer to the following points.
For winter tires:
•Select the size and load ranges that are the same as the original tires.
•Mount the tires to all four wheels.
For tire chains:
•Install them on the front tires only.
•Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, we strongly recommend using the
chains listed below:
•Follow the chain manufacturer’s instruction when installing. Mount them as
tightly as you can.
•Check that the chains do not touch the brake lines or suspension.
•Drive slowly.
Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1034
Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1038
1Winter Tires
NOTICE
Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly
installed can damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are
hitting any part of the vehicle.
When tire chains are mounted, follow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions regarding vehicle
operational limits.
3
WARNING
Using the wrong chains, or not properly
installing chains, can damage the brake
lines and cause a crash in which you can be
seriously injured or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner’s
manual regarding the selection and use of
tire chains.
4-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 267 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Maintenance
TOC
268
Maintenance
Battery
Checking the Battery
Check the battery condition monthly. Look at
the test indicator window and check the
terminals for corrosion.
If your vehicle’s battery is disconnected or goes dead:
•The audio system is disabled.
2Entering the audio security code P. 140
•The clock resets.
2Adjusting the Time P. 88
•The navigation system is disabled. A PIN code will be required.
2Refer to the navigation system manual
Charging the Battery
Disconnect both battery cables to prevent damaging your vehicle’s electrical system.
Always disconnect the negative (–) cable first, and reconnect it last.
1Battery
WARNING: Battery post, terminals,
and related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds.
Wash your hands after handling.
The test indicator’s color information is on the
battery.
When you find corrosion, clean the battery terminals
by applying a baking powder and water solution.
Rinse the terminals with water. Cloth/towel dry the
battery. Coat the terminals with grease to help
prevent future corrosion.
3
WARNING
The battery gives off explosive hydrogen
gas during normal operation.
A spark or flame can cause the battery to
explode with enough force to kill or
seriously hurt you.
When conducting any battery
maintenance, wear protective clothing and
a face shield, or have a skilled technician do
it.
Test Indicator Window
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 268 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
269
Remote Transmitter Care
Replacing the Battery
If the indicator does not come on when the button is pushed, replace the battery.
1. Unscrew the cover with a small Phillips-
head screwdriver. Push a button to pry
open the transmitter.
2. Open the keypad.
uWrap the small flat-tip screwdriver with a
cloth to prevent scratching the
transmitter.
3. Make sure to replace the battery with the
correct polarity.
1Replacing the Battery
NOTICE
An improperly disposed of battery can damage the
environment. Always confirm local regulations for
battery disposal.
Replacement batteries are commercially available or
at a dealer.
Keypad
Screw
Battery type: CR1616
Battery
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 269 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Maintenance
TOC
270
Maintenance
Climate Control System Maintenance
Dust and Pollen Filter
The climate control system is equipped with a dust and pollen filter that collects
pollen, dust, and other debris in the air. The Maintenance MinderTM messages will let
you know when to replace the filter.
We recommend that you replace the dust and pollen filter sooner when using your
vehicle in areas with high concentrations of dust.
1Dust and Pollen Filter
Using an air freshener may reduce the deodorizing
effect of the dust and pollen filter, and may reduce its
life.
If the air flow from the climate control system
deteriorates noticeably, and the windows fog up
easily, the filter may need to be replaced. Please
contact a dealer for replacement.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 270 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
271
Continued
Cleaning
Interior Care
Use a damp cloth with a mixture of mild detergent and warm water to remove dirt.
Use a clean cloth to remove detergent residue.
Use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean the seat belts.
Let the belts air dry. Wipe the openings of the seat belt anchors using a clean cloth.
■Cleaning Seat Belts
1Interior Care
Do not spill liquids inside the vehicle.
Electrical devices and systems may malfunction if
liquids are splashed on them.
Do not use silicone based sprays on electrical devices
such as audio devices and switches.
Doing so may cause the items to malfunction or a fire
inside the vehicle.
If a silicone based spray is inadvertently used on
electrical devices, consult a dealer.
Depending on their composition, chemicals and
liquid aromatics may cause discoloration, wrinkles,
and cracking to resin-based parts and textiles.
Do not use alkali solvents or organic solvents such as
benzene or gasoline.
After using chemicals, make sure to gently wipe them
off using a dry cloth.
Do not place used cloths on top of resin based parts
or textiles for long periods of time without washing.
Opening
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 271 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Maintenance
TOC
uuCleaninguInterior Care
272
Maintenance
The front floor mats hook over the floor
anchors, which keep the mats from sliding
forward. To remove a mat for cleaning, turn
the anchor knobs to the unlock position.
When reinstalling the mat after cleaning, turn
the knobs to the lock position.
Do not put additional floor mats on top of
the anchored mats.
Vacuum dirt and dust from the leather frequently. Pay close attention to the pleats
and seams. Clean the leather with a soft cloth dampened with a 90% water and
10% neutral soap solution. Then buff it with a clean, dry cloth. Remove any dust or
dirt on leather surfaces immediately.
■Floor Mats
1Floor Mats
If you use any floor mats that were not originally
provided with your vehicle, make sure they are
designed for your specific vehicle, fit correctly, and
are securely anchored by the floor anchors.
Position the rear seat floor mats properly. If they are
not properly positioned, the floor mats can interfere
with the front seat functions.
To unlock
Driver’s floor mat is shown.
■Maintaining Genuine Leather*
* Not available on all models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 272 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
273
uuCleaninguExterior Care
Continued
Exterior Care
Dust off the vehicle body after you drive.
Regularly inspect your vehicle for scratches on painted surfaces. A scratch on a
painted surface can result in body rust. If you find a scratch, promptly repair it.
Wash the vehicle regularly. Wash more frequently when driving in the
following conditions:
•If driving on roads with road salt.
•If driving in coastal areas.
•If tar, soot, bird droppings, insects, or tree sap are stuck to painted surfaces.
Fold in the door mirrors. Make sure to follow the instructions indicated on the
automated car wash.
•Keep sufficient distance between the cleaning nozzle and the vehicle body.
•Take particular care around the windows. Standing too close may cause water to
enter the vehicle interior. Do not spray water into the engine compartment.
■Washing the Vehicle
■Using an Automated Car Wash
■Using High Pressure Cleaners
1Washing the Vehicle
Do not spray water into the air intake vents or engine
compartment. It can cause a malfunction.
Air Intake Vents
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 273 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Maintenance
TOC
uuCleaninguExterior Care
274
Maintenance
A good coat of automotive body wax helps protect your vehicle’s paint from the
elements. Wax will wear off over time and expose your vehicle’s paint to the
elements, so reapply as necessary.
If you get gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery fluid on resin coated parts, they
may be stained or the coating may peel. Promptly wipe it away using a soft cloth and
clean water.
Wipe using a glass cleaner.
Aluminum is susceptible to deterioration caused by salt and other road
contaminants. Use a sponge and mild detergent to wipe away promptly.
Be careful not to use harsh chemicals (including some commercial wheel cleaners) or
a stiff brush. They can damage the clear coat of the aluminum alloy wheels that
helps keep the aluminum from corroding and tarnishing.
■Applying Wax
■Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
■Cleaning the Window
■Maintaining Aluminum Wheels
1Applying Wax
NOTICE
Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage
the paint, metal, and plastic on your vehicle. Wipe up
spills immediately.
1Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
Ask a dealer about the correct coating material when
you want to repair the painted surface of the parts
made of resin.
1Cleaning the Window
Wires are mounted to the inside of the rear window.
Wipe along the same direction as the wires with a
soft cloth so as not to damage them.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 274 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
275
Handling the Unexpected
This chapter explains how to handle unexpected troubles.
Tools .................................................. 276
Types of Tools .................................. 276
If a Tire Goes Flat.............................. 277
Changing a Flat Tire......................... 277
Engine Does Not Start
Checking the Engine........................ 283
Jump Starting.................................... 284
Shift Lever Does Not Move.............. 287
Overheating ...................................... 288
How to Handle Overheating............. 288
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking
If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator
. 290
If the Charging System Indicator
290
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
291
If the Brake System Indicator Comes On.. 292
If the EPS System Indicator Comes On... 292
If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS
293
Fuses
Fuse Locations ................................. 294
Circuit Protected and Amps for
296
Inspecting and Changing Fuses........ 298
Emergency Towing........................... 299
When You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill
Door................................................. 300
When You Cannot Open the Trunk.. 301
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 275 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Comes On.....................................
Comes On .....................................
Comes On or Blinks ........................
Indicator Comes On or Blinks..........
Each Fuse....................................
276
Handling the Unexpected
Tools
Types of Tools
1Types of Tools
The tools are stored in the trunk.
Wheel Nut Wrench/
Jack Handle
Jack
Jack Handle Bar
Tool Case
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 276 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
277
Continued
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake
gradually to reduce speed. Then, stop in a safe place. Replace the flat tire with a
compact spare tire. Go to a dealer as soon as possible to have the full-size tire
repaired or replaced.
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and non-slippery surface and apply the
parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever in (P.
2. Move the shift lever in (R.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Turn on the hazard warning lights and turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0.
1Changing a Flat Tire
Periodically check the tire pressure of the compact
spare. It should be set to the specified pressure.
Specified Pressure: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)
When driving with the compact spare tire, keep the
vehicle speed under 50 mph (80 km/h). Replace with
a full-size tire as soon as possible.
The compact spare tire and wheel in your vehicle are
specifically for this model.
Do not use them with another vehicle.
Do not use another type of compact spare tire or
wheel with your vehicle.
Do not mount tire chains on a compact spare tire.
If a chain-mounted front tire goes flat, remove one of
the full-size rear tires and replace it with the compact
spare tire. Remove the flat front tire and replace it will
the full-size tire that was removed from the rear.
Mount the tire chains on the front tire.
Do not use a puncture-repairing agent on a flat tire,
as it can damage the tire pressure sensor.
Automatic transmission models
Manual transmission models
All models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 277 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Handling the Unexpected
TOC
278
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected
1. Pull the handle on the trunk floor lid and
open the lid. Hook the handle to the edge
of the trunk opening.
2. Take the tool case out of the trunk. Take
the jack and wheel nut wrench out of the
tool case.
3. Unscrew the wing bolt, and remove the
spacer cone. Then, remove the spare tire.
4. Place a wheel block or rock in front and rear
of the wheel diagonal to the flat tire.
■Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire
Tool Case
Spare Tire
Wheel
Blocks
The tire to be replaced.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 278 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
279
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Continued
5. Place the compact spare tire (wheel side up)
under the vehicle body, near the tire that
needs to be replaced.
6. Loosen each wheel nut about one turn
using the wheel nut wrench.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 279 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Handling the Unexpected
TOC
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
280
Handling the Unexpected
1. Place the jack under the jacking point
closest to the tire to be changed.
2. Turn the end bracket (as shown in the
image) clockwise until the top of the jack
contacts the jacking point.
uMake sure that the jacking point tab is
resting in the jack notch.
3. Raise the vehicle, using the jack handle bar
and the jack handle, until the tire is off the
ground.
■How to Set Up the Jack
1How to Set Up the Jack
Do not use the jack with people or luggage in the
vehicle.
Use the jack provided in your vehicle.
Other jacks may not support the weight (“load”) or
their shape may not match.
The following instructions must be followed to use
the jack safely.
•Do not use while the engine is running.
•Use only where the ground is firm and level.
•Use only at the jacking points.
•Do not get in the vehicle while using the jack.
•Do not put anything on top of or underneath the
jack.
3
WARNING
The vehicle can easily roll off the jack,
seriously injuring anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for changing a tire
exactly, and never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the jack.
Jack
Handle
Bar
Wheel Nut
Wrench as Jack Handle
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 280 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
Continued 281
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
1. Remove the wheel nuts and flat tire.
2. Wipe the mounting surfaces of the wheel
with a clean cloth.
3. Mount the compact spare tire.
4. Screw the wheel nuts until they touch
the lips around the mounting holes, and
stop rotating.
5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack.
Tighten the wheel nuts in the order
indicated in the image. Go around,
tightening the nuts, two to three times in
this order.
Wheel nut torque:
80 lbf∙ft (108 N∙m, 11 kgf∙m)
■Replacing the Flat Tire
1Replacing the Flat Tire
Do not over tighten the wheel nuts by applying extra
torque using your foot or a pipe.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 281 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Handling the Unexpected
TOC
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
282
Handling the Unexpected
1. Remove the center cap and place the flat
tire face down in the spare tire well.
2. Remove the spacer cone from the wing
bolt, flip it over, and insert it back on the
bolt. Secure the flat tire with the wing bolt.
3. Securely put the jack and wheel nut
wrench back in the tool case. Store the case
in the trunk.
If you replace a flat tire with the spare tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator
comes on while you are driving. After driving for a few miles (kilometers), the
indicator will start blinking for a short time and then stay on. CHECK TPMS
SYSTEM appears on the multi-information display, but this is normal.
If you replace the tire with a specified regular tire, the warning message on
■Storing the Flat Tire
1Storing the Flat Tire
3
WARNING
Loose items can fly around the interior in a
crash and can seriously injure the
occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely
before driving.
Spacer
Cone Wing
Bolt
For
compact
spare tire
For
normal
tire
■TPMS and the Spare Tire
1TPMS and the Spare Tire
The system cannot monitor the pressure of the spare
tire. Manually check the spare tire pressure to be sure
that it is correct.
Use TPMS specific wheels. Each is equipped with a
tire pressure sensor mounted inside the tire behind
the valve stem.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 282 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
the multi-information display and the TPMS indicator will go off after a few
miles (kilometers).
283
Engine Does Not Start
Checking the Engine
If the engine does not start, check the starter.
Starter condition Checklist
Starter doesn’t turn or turns
over slowly.
The battery may be dead. Check
each of the items on the right and
respond accordingly.
Check brightness of the interior light.
Turn on interior lights and check brightness.
●If the interior lights are dim or do not come on at all
2Checking the Battery P. 268
●If the interior lights come on normally 2 Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 298
The starter turns over normally
but the engine doesn’t start.
There may be a problem with the
fuse. Check each of the items on
the right and respond accordingly.
Review the engine start procedure.
Follow its instructions, and try to start the engine again. 2 Starting the Engine P. 191
Check the immobilizer system indicator.
When the immobilizer system indicator is blinking, the engine cannot be started.
2Immobilizer System P. 98
Check the fuel level.
There should be enough fuel in the tank. 2 Fuel Gauge P. 75
Check the fuse.
Check all fuses, or have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
2Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 298
If the problem continues:
2Emergency Towing P. 299
1Checking the Engine
If you must start the vehicle immediately, use an
assisting vehicle to jump start it.
2Jump Starting P. 284
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 283 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Handling the Unexpected
TOC
284
Handling the Unexpected
Jump Starting
Turn off the power to electric devices, such as audio and lights. Turn off the engine,
then open the hood.
1. Slide out the battery terminal cover.
2. Connect the first jumper cable to your
vehicle’s battery + terminal.
3. Connect the other end of the first jumper
cable to the assisting vehicle’s + terminal.
uUse a 12-volt booster battery only.
4. Connect the second jumper cable to the
assisting vehicle’s - terminal.
■Jump Starting Procedure
1Jump Starting
Securely attach the jumper cables clips so that they
do not come off when the engine vibrates. Also be
careful not to tangle the jumper cables or allow the
cable ends to touch each other while attaching or
detaching the jumper cables.
3
WARNING
A battery can explode if you do not follow
the correct procedure, seriously injuring
anyone nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking
materials away from the battery.
Cover
6-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
4-cylinder models
Booster Battery
All models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 284 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
Continued 285
uuJump Startingu
5. Connect the other end of the second
jumper cable:
Engine mounting bolt
Transmission mounting bolt
Engine hanger
Do not connect this jumper cable to any
other part.
6. If your vehicle is connected to another
vehicle, start the assisting vehicle’s engine
and increase its rpm slightly.
7. Attempt to start your vehicle’s engine. If it
turns over slowly, check that the jumper
cables have good metal-to-metal contact.
1Jump Starting
Battery performance degrades in cold conditions and
may prevent the engine from starting.
6-cylinder models
Booster Battery
4-cylinder models with
automatic transmission
4-cylinder models with automatic transmission
4-cylinder models with manual transmission
6-cylinder models
4-cylinder models with
manual transmission
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 285 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
TOC
286
uuJump Startingu
Handling the Unexpected
Once your vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the
1. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle’s ground.
2. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the assisting vehicle’s
battery - terminal.
3. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle’s battery + terminal.
4. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the assisting vehicle’s
battery + terminal.
Have your vehicle inspected by a nearby service station or a dealer.
6-cylinder models
■What to Do After the Engine Starts
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 286 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
following order.
287
Shift Lever Does Not Move
Follow the procedure below if you cannot move the shift lever out of the
(P
position.
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
3. Wrap a cloth around the tip of a small flat-
tip screwdriver. Put it into the shift lock
release slot as shown in the image, and
remove the cover.
4. Insert the key into the shift lock release slot.
5. While pushing on the key down, press the
shift lever release button and place the shift
lever into (N.
uThe lock is now released. Have the shift
lever checked by a dealer as soon as
possible.
■Releasing the Lock
Automatic transmission models
Slot
Cover
Release Button
Shift Lock
Release Slot
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 287 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Handling the Unexpected
TOC
288
Handling the Unexpected
Overheating
How to Handle Overheating
Overheating symptoms are as follows:
•The temperature gauge needle is at the mark or the engine suddenly loses
power.
•Steam or spray comes out of the engine compartment.
■First thing to do
1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Turn off all accessories and turn on the hazard warning lights.
uNo steam or spray present: Keep the engine running and open the hood.
uSteam or spray is present: Turn off the engine and wait until it subsides.
Then open the hood.
1How to Handle Overheating
NOTICE
Continuing to drive with the temperature gauge
needle at the mark may damage the engine.
3
WARNING
Steam and spray from an overheated
engine can seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam is coming
out.
H
H
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 288 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
289
uuOverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating
■Next thing to do
1. Check that the cooling fan is operating and
stop the engine once the temperature
gauge needle comes down.
uIf the cooling fan is not operating,
immediately stop the engine.
2. Once the engine has cooled down, inspect
the coolant level and check the cooling
system components for leaks.
uIf the coolant level in the reserve tank is
low, add coolant until it reaches the
MAX mark.
uIf there is no coolant in the reserve tank,
check that the radiator is cool. Cover the
radiator cap with a heavy cloth and open
the cap. If necessary, add coolant up to
the base of the filler neck, and put the
cap back on.
■Last thing to do
Once the engine has cooled sufficiently, restart it and check the temperature gauge.
If the temperature gauge needle has gone down, resume driving. If it has not gone
down, contact a dealer for repairs.
1How to Handle Overheating
If the coolant is leaking, contact a dealer for repairs.
Use water as an emergency/temporary measure only.
Have a dealer flush the system with proper antifreeze
as soon as possible.
3
WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the
engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray
out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool
down before removing the radiator cap.
MAX Reserve Tank
MIN
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 289 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Handling the Unexpected
TOC
290
Handling the Unexpected
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking
If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On
■Reasons for the indicator to come on
Comes on when the engine oil pressure is low.
■What to do as soon as the indicator comes on
1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. If necessary, turn the hazard warning lights on.
■What to do after parking the vehicle
1. Stop the engine and let it sit for about one minute.
2. Open the hood and check the oil level.
uAdd oil as necessary.
3. Start the engine and check the low oil pressure indicator.
uThe light goes out: Start driving again.
uThe light does not go out within 10 seconds: Stop the engine and
contact a dealer for repairs immediately.
If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
■Reasons for the indicator to come on
Comes on when the battery is not being charged.
■What to do when the indicator comes on
Turn off the climate control system, rear defogger, and other electrical
systems, and immediately contact a dealer for repairs.
1If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On
NOTICE
Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause
serious mechanical damage almost immediately.
1If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
If you need to stop temporarily, do not turn off the
engine. Restarting the engine may rapidly discharge
the battery.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 290 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
291
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
■Reasons for indicator lamp to come on or blink
•Comes on when there is a problem with the engine emissions control
system, or the fuel fill cap is missing, or loose.
•Blinks when engine misfiring is detected.
■What to do when the indicator lamp comes on
Avoid high speeds and immediately get your vehicle inspected at
a dealer.
■What to do when the indicator lamp blinks
Park the vehicle in a safe place with no flammable items and wait at least
ten minutes or more with the engine stopped until it cools.
■The message appears on when:
An evaporative system leak is detected. This may be caused by the fuel fill cap being
loose or not being installed.
■What to do when the message appears:
1. Stop the engine.
2. Check that the fuel fill cap is fully installed.
uIf not, loosen the cap, and then retighten it until it clicks at least once.
3. Drive for several days of normal driving.
uThe message should go off.
■When the malfunction indicator lamp comes on:
Malfunction indicator lamp comes on if the system continues to detect a leak of
gasoline vapor. If this happens, check the fuel fill cap using the procedures
described above.
■Tighten Fuel Fill Cap Message
1If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
NOTICE
If you drive with the malfunction indicator lamp on,
the emissions control system and the engine could be
damaged.
If the malfunction indicator lamp blinks again when
restarting the engine, drive to the nearest dealer at
31 mph (50 km/h) or less. Have your vehicle
inspected.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 291 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Handling the Unexpected
TOC
Comes On or Blinks
292
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Brake System Indicator Comes On
Handling the Unexpected
If the Brake System Indicator Comes On
■Reasons for the indicator to come on
•The brake fluid is low.
•There is a malfunction in the brake system.
■What to do when the indicator comes on while driving
Press the brake pedal lightly to check pedal pressure.
•If normal, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop.
•If abnormal, take immediate action. If necessary, downshift the
transmission to slow the vehicle using engine braking.
If the EPS System Indicator Comes On
■Reasons for the indicator to come on
•Comes on when there is a problem with EPS system.
•If you depress the accelerator pedal repeatedly to increase the engine
speed while the engine is idling, the indicator comes on, and
sometimes the steering wheel becomes harder to operate.
■What to do when the indicator comes on
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and restart the engine.
If the indicator comes on and stays on, immediately have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer.
1If the Brake System Indicator Comes On
Have your vehicle repaired immediately.
It is dangerous to drive with low brake fluid. If there
is no resistance from the brake pedal, stop
immediately in a safe place. If necessary downshift
the gears.
If the brake system indicator and ABS indicator come
on simultaneously, the brake distribution system is
not working. This can result in vehicle instability
under sudden braking.
Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer immediately.
U.S.
Canada
1If the EPS System Indicator Comes On
NOTICE
If you repeatedly turn the steering wheel at an
extremely low speed, or hold the steering wheel on
the full left or right position for a while, the system
heats up. The system goes into a protective mode,
and limits its performance. The steering wheel
becomes harder and harder to operate. Once the
system cools down, EPS system is restored. Repeated
operation under these conditions can eventually
damage the system.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 292 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
293
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks
If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS
Indicator Comes On or
Blinks
■Reasons for the indicator to come on or blink
A tire pressure is significantly low. If there is a problem with the TPMS or
the compact spare tire is installed, the indicator blinks for about one
minute, and then stays on.
■What to do when the indicator comes on
Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Check the tire pressure and adjust the
pressure to the specified level. The specified tire pressure is on a label on
the driver side doorjamb.
■What to do when the indicator blinks
Have the tire inspected by a dealer as soon as possible. If the compact
spare tire causes the indicator to blink, change the tire to a full-size tire.
The indicator goes off after driving for a few miles (kilometers).
1If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks
NOTICE
Driving on an extremely underinflated tire can cause
it to overheat. An overheated tire can fail. Always
inflate your tires to the prescribed level.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 293 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Handling the Unexpected
TOC
294
Handling the Unexpected
Fuses
Fuse Locations
If any electrical devices are not working, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 and
check to see if any applicable fuse is blown.
Located near the brake fluid reservoir. Push
the tabs to open the box.
Located under the dashboard.
■Engine Compartment Fuse Box
1Engine Compartment Fuse Box
Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box cover.
Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and
box cover number.
■Driver Side Fuse Box
1Driver Side Fuse Box
Fuse locations are shown on the label on the side
panel.
Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and
label number.
Fuse Label
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 294 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
295
uuFusesuFuse Locations
Located on the lower side panel. Take off the
cover to open.
■Passenger Side Fuse Box
1Passenger Side Fuse Box
Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box cover.
Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and
box cover number.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 295 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Handling the Unexpected
TOC
296
uuFusesuCircuit Protected and Amps for Each Fuse
Handling the Unexpected
Circuit Protected and Amps for Each Fuse
The current rating in brackets indicate that
you may find a fuse in the location even if
your particular model is not equipped with
the device the fuse is used for.
■Engine Compartment
Circuit Protected Amps
1Battery 100 A*1
120 A*2
Passenger’s Side Fuse Box 40 A
2
EPS 70 A
Passenger’s Side Fuse Box (40 A)
ABS/VSA FSR 30 A
−−
ABS/VSA Motor 30 A
−−
3
IG 50 A
Driver’s Side Fuse Box (40 A)
Passenger’s Side Light Main 30 A
Driver’s Side Fuse Box (60 A)
Driver’s Side Light Main 30 A
Main Fan Motor 30 A
−*1 −
Wiper Motor*2 30 A
Wiper Motor*1
30 A
Sub Fan Motor*2
*1:4-cylinder models
*2:6-cylinder models
4 Rear Defogger 40 A
5Sub Fan Motor*1 20 A
−*2 −
6− −
7 − −
8 Heater Motor 40 A
9Hazard 15 A
10 Horn 10 A
11 − −
12 Stop 15 A
13 IG Coil 15 A
14 FI Sub 15 A
15 Backup 10 A
16 Interior Lights 7.5 A
17 FI Main 15 A
18 DBW 15 A
19 −*1 −
Back Up FI ECU*2 7.5A
20 MG Clutch 7.5 A
21 Engine Oil Level*1
7.5 A
Fan RLY*2
Circuit Protected Amps ■Driver Side
Circuit Protected Amps
1 − −
2Seat Memory (7.5 A)
3Washer 15 A
4Wiper 10 A
5Meter 7.5 A
6ABS/VSA 7.5 A
7ACG 15 A
8STS*1
(7.5 A)
Starter DIAG*2
9Fuel Pump 20 A
10 VB SOL*(10 A)
11 SRS 10 A
12 ODS 7.5 A
13 −*1
(7.5 A)
STS*2
14 − −
15 Daytime Running Lights 7.5 A
16 A/C 7.5 A
17 Accessory, Key, Lock 7.5 A
* Not available on all models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 296 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
297
uuFusesuCircuit Protected and Amps for Each Fuse
*1:4-cylinder models
*2:6-cylinder models
18 Accessory 7.5 A
19 Driver’s Power Seat Sliding (20 A)
20 Moonroof (20 A)
21 Driver’s Power Seat
Reclining (20 A)
22 Rear Driver’s Side Power
Window 20 A
23 Front Accessory Power
Socket 20 A
24 Driver’s Power Window 20 A
25 Driver’s Side Door Lock 15 A
26 Left Front Fog Light (10 A)
27 Left Side Small Lights
(Exterior) 10 A
28 Left Headlight High Beam 10 A
29 TPMS 10 A
30 Left Headlight Low Beam 15 A
31 − −
32 Engine Oil Level*(7.5 A)
Circuit Protected Amps ■Passenger Side
Circuit Protected Amps
1Right Headlight High Beam 10 A
2Right Side Small Lights
(Exterior) 10 A
3Right Front Fog Light (10 A)
4Right Headlight Low Beam 15 A
5 − −
6Interior Lights 7.5 A
7 − −
8Passenger’s Side Power Seat
Reclining 20 A
9Passenger’s Side Power Seat
Sliding 20 A
10 Right Side Door Lock 10 A
11 Rear Passenger’s Side Power
Window 20 A
12 Console Accessory Power
Socket 20 A
13 Front Passenger’s Power
Window 20 A
14 − −
15 Premium AMP (20 A)
16 − −
17 − −
18 − −
19 Seat Heater 20 A
20 − −
21 − −
22 − −
Circuit Protected Amps
* Not available on all models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 297 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Handling the Unexpected
TOC
298
uuFusesuInspecting and Changing Fuses
Handling the Unexpected
Inspecting and Changing Fuses
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0. Turn
headlights and all accessories off.
2. Remove the fuse box cover.
3. Check the large fuse in the engine
compartment.
uIf the fuse is blown, use a Phillips-head
screwdriver to remove the screw and
replace it with a new one.
4. Inspect the small fuses in the engine
compartment and the vehicle interior.
uIf there is a burned out fuse, remove it
with the fuse puller and replace it with a
new one.
1Inspecting and Changing Fuses
NOTICE
Replacing a fuse with one that has a higher rating
greatly increases the chances of damaging the
electrical system. If you do not have a replacement
fuse with the proper rating for the circuit, install one
with a lower rating.
Replace fuse with a spare fuse of the same specified
amperage.
Confirm the specified amperage using the charts on
P. 296 and P. 297.
There is a fuse puller on the back of the engine
compartment fuse box.
Fuse Blown Fuse
Combined Fuse
Blown Fuse
Fuse Puller
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 298 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
299
Emergency Towing
Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.
■Flat bed equipment
The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck.
This is the best way to transport your vehicle.
■Wheel lift equipment
The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the front tires and lift them off
the ground. The rear tires remain on the ground. This is an acceptable way to
tow your vehicle.
1Emergency Towing
NOTICE
Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will
cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed
to support the vehicle’s weight.
NOTICE
Improper towing such as towing behind a
motorhome or other motor vehicle can damage the
transmission.
Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain.
It is very dangerous, since ropes or chains may shift
from side to side or break.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 299 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Handling the Unexpected
TOC
300
Handling the Unexpected
When You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door
If you cannot unlock the fuel fill door, use the following procedure.
1. Open the trunk and pull off the left inside
cover.
2. Pull the release lever towards you.
uThe release lever unlocks the fuel fill door
when it is pulled, and locks when
returned to its original position.
■What to Do When Unable to Unlock the Fuel Fill Door
1What to Do When Unable to Unlock the Fuel Fill Door
After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have the
vehicle checked.
Cover
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 300 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
301
When You Cannot Open the Trunk
If you cannot open the trunk, use the following procedure.
1. Remove the rear outer head restraint on the
rear left side, and open the tether anchor
point cover.
2. Insert the key into the cylinder and turn the
key to the right.
■What to Do When Unable to Open the Trunk
1What to Do When Unable to Open the Trunk
After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have the
vehicle checked.
Tether Anchor
Point Cover
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 301 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Handling the Unexpected
TOC
302
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 302 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
303
Information
This chapter includes your vehicle’s specifications, locations of identification numbers, and other
information required by regulation.
Specifications.................................... 304
Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).. 308
Engine Number and Transmission
Number ......................................308
Devices that Emit Radio Waves....... 309
Reporting Safety Defects................. 310
Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes.............. 311
Warranty Coverages ........................ 313
Authorized Manuals......................... 315
Client Service Information ............... 316
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 303 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
304
Information
Specifications
■Vehicle Specifications
*1: Automatic transmission models
*2: Manual transmission models
Model Acura TSX
No. of Passengers:
Front 2
Rear 3
Total 5
Weights:
Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating
U.S.: 4,475 lbs (2,030 kg)*1
Canada: 2,030 kg*1
U.S.: 4,395 lbs (1,995 kg)*2
Canada: 1,995 kg*2
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Front) U.S.: 2,410 lbs (1,095 kg)*1
Canada: 1,095 kg*1
U.S.: 2,325 lbs (1,055 kg)*2
Canada: 1,055 kg*2
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Rear) U.S.: 2,090 lbs (950 kg)
Canada: 950 kg
Air Conditioning:
Refrigerant Type HFC-134a (R-134a)
Charge Quantity 15.8 – 17.6 oz (450 – 500 g)
Lubricant Type SP-10
4-cylinder models
■Engine Specifications
■Fuel
■Battery
■Washer Fluid
Displacement 144 cu-in (2,354 cm3)
Spark Plugs NGK ILZKR7B-11S
DENSO SXU22HCR11S
Fuel:
Type
Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number
of 91 or higher
Fuel Tank Capacity 18.5 US gal (70 ℓ)
Capacity/Type 36AH(5)/45AH(20)
36AH(5)/47AH(20)
Tank Capacity U.S.: 2.6 US qt (2.5 ℓ)
Canada: 4.8 US qt (4.5 ℓ)
■Light Bulbs
*3: Vehicle with discharge headlights
*4: Vehicle with halogen bulb low beam headlights
Headlights (Low Beam) 35W (D2S)*3
55W (H1)*4
Headlights (High Beam) 60W (HB3)
Fog Lights 55W (H11)
Front Turn Signal/Parking/Side
Marker Lights 21/5W
Side Turn Signal Lights
(on Door Mirrors) LED
Brake/Taillights 21/5W
Rear Turn Signal Lights 21W
Back-Up Lights 21W
Rear Side Marker Lights 3CP
High-Mount Brake Light 21W
License Plate Lights 5W
Trunk Light 5W
Interior Lights
Spotlight 8W
Ceiling Light 8W
Vanity Mirror Lights 2W
Courtesy Lights 3.8W
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 304 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
305
uuSpecificationsu
Continued
■Brake/Clutch Fluid
■Transmission Fluid
*1: Automatic transmission models
*2: Manual transmission models
Specified Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
Specified*1
Acura ATF DW-1
(automatic
transmission fluid)
2.6 US qt (2.5 ℓ)
(Change)
Specified*2 Acura Manual
Transmission Fluid
2.0 US qt (1.9 ℓ)
(Change)
■Engine Oil
■Engine Coolant
*1: Automatic transmission models
*2: Manual transmission models
Recommended ·Acura Genuine Motor Oil 0W-20
·API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil
Capacity
Change 4.0 US qt (3.8 ℓ)
Change
including
filter
4.2 US qt (4.0 ℓ)
Specified Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2
Ratio 50/50 with distilled water
Capacity*1
1.64 US gal (6.2 ℓ)
(change including the remaining
0.196 US gal (0.74 ℓ) in the reserve tank)
Capacity*2
1.66 US gal (6.3 ℓ)
(change including the remaining
0.196 US gal (0.74 ℓ) in the reserve tank)
■Tire
Regular
Size P225/50R17 93V
Pressure
psi (kPa [kgf/cm2]) 33 (230 [2.3])
Compact
Spare
Size T135/80D16 101M
Pressure
psi (kPa [kgf/cm2]) 60 (420 [4.2])
Wheel Size Regular 17 x 7.5J
Compact Spare 16 x 4T
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 305 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Information
TOC
306
uuSpecificationsu
Information
■Vehicle Specifications
Model Acura TSX
No. of Passengers:
Front 2
Rear 3
Total 5
Weights:
Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating
U.S.: 4,630 lbs (2,100 kg)
Canada: 2,100 kg
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Front) U.S.: 2,557 lbs (1,160 kg)
Canada: 1,160 kg
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Rear) U.S.: 2,083 lbs (945 kg)
Canada: 945 kg
Air Conditioning:
Refrigerant Type HFC-134a (R-134a)
Charge Quantity 15.8 – 17.6 oz (450 – 500 g)
Lubricant Type SP-10
6-cylinder models
■Engine Specifications
■Fuel
■Battery
■Washer Fluid
Displacement 212 cu-in (3,471 cm3)
Spark Plugs NGK ILZKR7B11
DENSO SXU22HCR11
Fuel:
Type
Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number
of 91 or higher
Fuel Tank Capacity 18.5 US gal (70 ℓ)
Capacity/Type 55AH(5)/72AH(20)
Tank Capacity U.S.: 2.6 US qt (2.5 ℓ)
Canada: 4.8 US qt (4.5 ℓ)
■Light Bulbs
Headlights (Low Beam) 35W (D2S)
Headlights (High Beam) 60W (HB3)
Fog Lights 55W (H11)
Front Turn Signal/Parking/Side
Marker Lights 21/5W
Side Turn Signal Lights
(on Door Mirrors) LED
Brake/Taillights 21/5W
Rear Turn Signal Lights 21W
Back-Up Lights 21W
Rear Side Marker Lights 3CP
High-Mount Brake Light 21W
License Plate Lights 5W
Trunk Light 5W
Interior Lights
Spotlight 8W
Ceiling Light 8W
Vanity Mirror Lights 2W
Courtesy Lights 3.8W
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 306 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
307
uuSpecificationsu
■Brake/Clutch Fluid
■Transmission Fluid
Specified Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
Specified
Acura ATF DW-1
(automatic
transmission fluid)
3.5 US qt (3.3 ℓ)
(Change)
■Engine Oil
■Engine Coolant
Recommended ·Acura Genuine Motor Oil 0W-20
·API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil
Capacity
Change 4.2 US qt (4.0 ℓ)
Change
including
filter
4.5 US qt (4.3 ℓ)
Specified Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2
Ratio 50/50 with distilled water
Capacity
1.77 US gal (6.7 ℓ)
(change including the remaining
0.196 US gal (0.74 ℓ) in the reserve tank)
■Tire
Regular
Size P235/45R18 94V
Pressure
psi (kPa [kgf/cm2]) 33 (230 [2.3])
Compact
Spare
Size T135/80D16 101M
Pressure
psi (kPa [kgf/cm2]) 60 (420 [4.2])
Wheel Size Regular 18 x 8J
Compact Spare 16 x 4T
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 307 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Information
TOC
308
Information
Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Your vehicle has a 17-digit vehicle identification number (VIN) used to register your
vehicle for warranty purposes, and for licensing and insuring your vehicle. See the
image below for the VIN locations.
Engine Number and Transmission Number
See the image below for the locations of your vehicle’s engine number and
transmission number.
Vehicle Identification Number
Engine Number
Certification Label/
Vehicle Identification
Number
Manual Transmission
Number
Automatic Transmission
Number
6-cylinder models
4-cylinder models
Engine Number
Automatic Transmission
Number
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 308 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
309
Devices that Emit Radio Waves
The following products and systems on your vehicle emit radio waves when in
operation.
Each of the above complies with the appropriate requirements or the required
standards of FCC (Federal Communications Commission) and Industry Canada
Standard, described below:
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-Gen/210/310. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
AcuraLink Audio System
Bluetooth® Audio Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver Immobilizer System
Remote Transmitter Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
U.S. models
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 309 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Information
TOC
310
Information
Reporting Safety Defects
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 310 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
In the U.S.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer,
or American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to: Administrator, NHTSA,
1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform
Honda Canada Inc. and you may also inform Transport Canada.
If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may lead to a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.
To contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations and Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For more information on
reporting safety defects or about motor vehicle safety, go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety
.
.
311
Continued
Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes
Your vehicle uses “readiness codes,” as part of its onboard self diagnostic system.
Some states refer to these codes during testing to see if your vehicle’s emissions
components are working properly.
The codes may not be read if you go through the testing just after the battery has
gone dead or been disconnected.
To check if they are set, turn the ignition switch to ON (w, without starting the
engine. The malfunction indicator lamp will come on for several seconds. If it then
goes off, the readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes are
not set.
If you are required to have your vehicle tested before the readiness codes are ready,
prepare the vehicle for retesting by doing the following:
1. Fill the gas tank to approximately 3/4 full.
2. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 6 hours or more.
3. Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40 °F and 95 °F (4 °C and 35 °C).
4. Start the engine without touching the accelerator pedal, and let it idle for
5. Keep the vehicle in (P (automatic transmission) or (N (manual transmission).
Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there until the temperature
gauge rises to at least 1/4 of the scale (about 3 minutes).
6. Let the engine idle with your foot off the accelerator for 20 seconds.
1Testing of Readiness Codes
The readiness codes are erased when the battery is
disconnected, and set again only after several days of
driving under a variety of conditions.
If a testing facility determines that the readiness
codes are not set, you may be requested to return at
a later date to complete the test.
If the testing facility determines the readiness codes
are still not set, see a dealer.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 311 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Information
TOC
20 seconds.
312
uuEmissions TestinguTesting of Readiness Codes
Information
7. Select a nearby, lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed
of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in
(D (automatic) or 5th (manual). Do not use cruise control. When traffic allows,
drive for 90 seconds without moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed may
vary slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds
because of traffic conditions, drive for at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two
more times (for a total of 90 seconds).
8. Drive in city/suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions
allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal
or the brake pedal.
9. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 30 minutes.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 312 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
313
Continued
Warranty Coverages
■U.S. Owners
Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties:
New Vehicle Limited Warranty – covers your new vehicle, except for the
emissions control systems, and accessories, against defects in materials and
workmanship.
Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance
Warranty – these two warranties cover your vehicle’s emissions control systems.
Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for
exact information.
Seat Belt Limited Warranty – a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered
by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty – all exterior body panels are covered for
rust-through from the inside for the specified time period with no mileage limit.
Accessory Limited Warranty – Acura accessories are covered under this warranty.
Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other factors. Please
read your warranty booklet for details.
Replacement Parts Limited Warranty – covers all Acura replacement parts
against defects in materials and workmanship.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 313 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Information
TOC
314
uuWarranty Coveragesu
Information
Replacement Battery Limited Warranty – provides prorated coverage for a
replacement battery purchased from a dealer.
Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty – provides coverage for as
long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the vehicle.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the 2013 Acura
warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on
warranty coverages. Your vehicle’s original tires are covered by their manufacturer.
Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.
■Canadian Owners
Please refer to the 2013 warranty manual that came with your vehicle.
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 314 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
315
Authorized Manuals
■For U.S. Owners:
The publications listed below can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can
order a manual by phone at (800) 782-4356 (credit card orders only), or online at
www.helminc.com.
Make an inquiry to Helm Inc. at (800) 782-4356 if you are interested in ordering
other models’ or other years’ manuals.
Publication
Form Number Form Description
61TL204 2011-2013 Acura TSX L4 Sedan/Sport Wagon Service Manual
61TP103 2013 Acura TSX V6 Service Manual
61TL204EL 2011-2013 Acura TSX
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual
61TP103EL 2013 Acura TSX V6
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual
61TL232 2009-2013 Acura TSX Body Repair Manual
31TL1640 2013 Acura TSX Owner’s Manual
31TL1840 2013 Acura TSX
Navigation System Owner’s Manual
31TL1M40 2013 Acura TSX Maintenance Journal
31TL1Q40 2013 Acura TSX Advanced Technology Guide
ACU-R Order Form for Previous Years-
Indicate Year and Model Desired
1Authorized Manuals
Service Manual:
Covers maintenance and recommended procedures
for repair to engine and chassis components. It is
written for the journeyman technician, but it is simple
enough for most mechanically inclined owners to
understand.
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
Complements the Service Manual by providing in-
depth troubleshooting information for each electrical
circuit in your vehicle.
Body Repair Manual:
Describes the procedures involved in the replacement
of damaged body parts.
For Canadian Owners:
Si vous avez besoin d’un Manuel du propriétaire en
français, veuillez demander à votre concessionnaire
de commander le numéro de pièce 33TL1C40
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 315 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Information
TOC
316
Information
Client Service Information
Acura dealer personnel are trained professionals.
They should be able to answer all your questions. If you encounter a problem that
your dealership does not solve to your satisfaction, please discuss it with the
dealership’s service manager or general manager. If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership’s management, contact Acura Client Relations/
Services.
U.S. Owners:
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Acura Client Relations
Mail Stop 500-2N-7E
1919 Torrance Blvd.
Torrance, CA 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 382-2238
Canadian Owners:
Honda Canada Inc.
Acura Client Services
180 Honda Boulevard
Markham, ON
L6C 0H9
Tel: 1-888-9-ACURA-9
Fax: 1-877-939-0909
E-Mail: acura_cr@ch.honda.com
In Puerto Rico and the
U.S. Virgin Islands:
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
Tel: (787) 620-7546
1Client Service Information
When you call or write, please give us the following
information:
•Vehicle Identification Number
2Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
P. 308
•Date of purchase
•Odometer reading of your vehicle
•Your name, address, and telephone number
•A detailed description of the problem
•Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 316 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
TOC
2013 TSX
Index
317
Index
A
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System).................. 212
Accessories and Modifications ................ 219
Accessory Power Sockets ......................... 129
Active Head Restraints............................. 122
Additives
Coolant .................................................. 240
Engine Oil ............................................... 234
Washer ................................................... 246
Additives, Engine Oil ............................... 234
Adjusting
Armrest .................................................. 124
Front Seats.............................................. 116
Head Restraints....................................... 118
Headlights .............................................. 247
Mirrors.................................................... 114
Rear Seats............................................... 123
Steering Wheel ....................................... 113
Temperature ............................................. 78
Air Conditioning System (Climate Control
System).................................................... 133
Changing the Mode................................ 133
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows .............................................. 134
Dust and Pollen Filter .............................. 270
Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode................... 133
Sensor .................................................... 136
Synchronized Mode ................................ 135
Using Automatic Climate Control............ 133
Air Pressure .............................. 260, 305, 307
Airbags ........................................................ 33
Advanced Airbags ..................................... 39
After a Collision......................................... 37
Airbag Care............................................... 47
Event Data Recorder .................................. 19
Front Airbags (SRS) .................................... 36
Indicator........................................ 44, 67, 70
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator .................. 45
Sensors...................................................... 33
Side Airbag Cutoff System ......................... 42
Side Airbag Off Indicator ........................... 46
Side Airbags .............................................. 40
Side Curtain Airbags .................................. 43
AM/FM Radio ............................................ 143
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 212
Indicator.................................................... 66
Armrest ..................................................... 124
Audio System ............................................ 138
Adjusting the Sound................................ 142
Auxiliary Input Jack .................................. 140
Error Messages ........................................ 158
General Information ................................ 161
MP3/WMA/AAC ...................................... 153
Recommended CDs ................................. 162
Recommended Devices ............................ 164
Remote Controls ..................................... 160
Security Code .......................................... 140
Theft Protection....................................... 140
USB Adapter Cable.................................. 139
USB Flash Drives ...................................... 164
Authorized Manuals................................. 315
Auto Door Lock/Unlock.............................. 94
Customize........................................... 81, 83
Automatic Lighting .................................. 106
Automatic Transmission........................... 194
Creeping................................................. 194
Fluid........................................................ 242
Kickdown................................................ 194
Operating the Shift Lever................... 13, 196
Sequential Shift Mode ............................. 197
Shift Lever Does Not Move ...................... 287
Shifting ................................................... 195
Auxiliary Input Jack.................................. 140
Average Fuel Economy .............................. 78
Average Speed ........................................... 79
Battery ...................................................... 268
Charging System Indicator................. 65, 290
Jump Starting.......................................... 284
Maintenance (Checking the Battery)........ 268
Maintenance (Replacing) ......................... 269
Belts (Seat).................................................. 26
Beverage Holders ..................................... 128
Bluetooth® Audio ..................................... 156
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®..................... 167
Booster Seats (For Children) ...................... 59
Brake System ............................................ 210
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)................... 212
Brake Assist System ................................. 213
Fluid........................................................ 244
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 317 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
2013 TSX
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
B
318
Foot Brake ............................................... 211
Indicator ............................................ 64, 292
Parking Brake .......................................... 210
Brightness Control (Instrument Panel) .... 109
Bulb Replacement..................................... 247
Back-Up Lights......................................... 254
Brake Light, Taillight, Rear Turn Signal
Light and Rear Side Marker Lights .......... 253
Fog Lights................................................ 251
Front Turn Signal/Parking/Side Marker
Lights..................................................... 252
Headlights ............................................... 247
High-Mount Brake Light .......................... 256
Rear License Plate Light............................ 255
Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator
Lights..................................................... 253
Bulb Specifications............................ 304, 306
Carbon Monoxide Gas................................ 60
Cargo Hooks.............................................. 130
Carrying Cargo.................................. 183, 185
CD Player ................................................... 147
Certification Label .................................... 308
Changing Bulbs......................................... 247
Charging System Indicator................. 65, 290
Child Safety................................................. 48
Childproof Door Locks ............................... 94
Emergency Trunk Opener .......................... 97
Child Seat.................................................... 48
Booster Seats ............................................ 59
Child Seat for Infants................................. 50
Child Seat for Small Children..................... 51
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder
Seat Belt.................................................. 55
Larger Children ......................................... 58
Rear-facing Child Seat ............................... 50
Selecting a Child Seat................................ 52
Using a Tether........................................... 57
Childproof Door Locks ............................... 94
Cleaning the Exterior ............................... 273
Cleaning the Interior................................ 271
Client Service Information ....................... 316
Climate Control System............................ 133
Changing the Mode ................................ 133
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows............................................... 134
Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 270
Recirculation and Fresh Air Mode ............ 133
Sensors ................................................... 136
Synchronized Mode................................. 135
Using Automatic Climate Control ............ 133
Clock............................................................ 88
Clutch Fluid............................................... 245
Coat Hook................................................. 130
Compact Spare Tire .................. 277, 305, 307
Compass .................................................... 179
Console Compartment ............................. 127
Controls....................................................... 87
Coolant (Engine) ...................................... 240
Adding to the Radiator ........................... 241
Adding to the Reserve Tank .................... 240
Overheating............................................ 288
Temperature Gauge.................................. 75
Creeping (Automatic Transmission)........ 194
Cruise Control .......................................... 201
Indicator ................................................... 71
Cup Holders.............................................. 128
Customized Features ................................. 80
Daytime Running Lights .......................... 107
Dead Battery ............................................ 284
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows................................................. 134
Detachable Shelf...................................... 126
Devices that Emit Radio Waves............... 309
Dimming
Headlights .............................................. 105
Rear View Mirror..................................... 114
Dipstick (Engine Oil) ................................ 235
Directional Signals (Turn Signal)............. 105
Door Mirrors............................................. 114
Doors .......................................................... 89
Auto Door Lock ........................................ 94
Auto Door Unlock..................................... 94
Door and Trunk Open Indicator........... 25, 68
Keys.......................................................... 89
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 318 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Index A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
C
D
319
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Inside ...................................................... 93
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Outside ................................................... 91
Lockout Prevention System ....................... 92
DOT Tire Quality Grading........................ 262
Driving ...................................................... 181
Automatic Transmission .......................... 194
Braking ................................................... 210
Cruise Control ........................................ 201
Shifting Gear .................................. 195, 199
Starting the Engine ................................. 191
Driving Position Memory System ............ 111
Dust and Pollen Filter .............................. 270
Elapsed Time .............................................. 79
Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Indicator ........................................... 68, 292
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ............ 204
Emergency................................................ 299
Emergency Trunk Opener ......................... 97
Emissions Testing (Readiness Codes) ...... 311
Engine....................................................... 308
Coolant .................................................. 240
Jump Starting ......................................... 284
Oil .......................................................... 234
Starting................................................... 191
Switch Buzzer ......................................... 104
Engine Coolant ......................................... 240
Adding to the Radiator ............................ 241
Adding to the Reserve Tank ..................... 240
Overheating ............................................ 288
Temperature Gauge .................................. 75
Engine Oil ................................................. 234
Adding .................................................... 237
Checking................................................. 235
Displaying Oil Life .................................... 225
Low Oil Pressure Indicator.................. 64, 290
Recommended Engine Oil........................ 234
EPS (Electric Power Steering)
System ............................................... 68, 292
Exhaust Gas Hazard (Carbon Monoxide) .. 60
Exterior Care (Cleaning) ........................... 273
Exterior Mirrors ........................................ 114
Features..................................................... 137
Filters
Dust and Pollen ....................................... 270
Oil ........................................................... 238
Flat Tire ..................................................... 277
Floor Mats ................................................. 272
Fluids
Automatic Transmission........................... 242
Brake/Clutch............................................ 244
Engine Coolant........................................ 240
Manual Transmission ............................... 243
Windshield Washer.................................. 246
Fog Light Indicator..................................... 70
Folding Down the Rear Seats .................. 123
Foot Brake ................................................ 211
Front Airbags (SRS)..................................... 36
Front Seats................................................ 116
Adjusting ................................................ 116
Fuel...................................................... 14, 215
Economy................................................. 218
Gauge....................................................... 75
Instant Fuel Economy ................................ 78
Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 66
Range ....................................................... 78
Recommendation .................................... 215
Refueling................................................. 215
Fuel Economy ........................................... 218
Fuel Fill Cap ........................................ 14, 217
Message.................................................. 291
Fuel Fill Door ...................................... 14, 216
Unable to Unlock .................................... 300
Fuses.......................................................... 294
Inspecting and Changing......................... 298
Locations................................................. 294
Gasoline (Fuel)
Economy................................................. 218
Gauge....................................................... 75
Information ............................................. 215
Instant Fuel Economy ................................ 78
Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 66
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 319 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Index A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
E
F
G
320
Refueling................................................. 215
Gauges......................................................... 75
Gear Shift Lever Positions
Automatic Transmission........................... 195
Manual Transmission ............................... 199
Glass (care) ................................................ 274
Glove Box .................................................. 126
Halogen Bulbs................................... 247, 251
Handling the Unexpected ........................ 275
HandsFreeLink® (HFL)............................... 167
Change Language ................................... 178
Help Features........................................... 168
Information Display.................................. 168
Making a Call .......................................... 173
Menus ..................................................... 169
Muting a Call........................................... 174
Phone Setup............................................ 171
Phonebook.............................................. 175
Receiving a Call ....................................... 174
Sending Numbers or Names During a
Call........................................................ 174
Transferring a Call ................................... 174
Hazard Warning Button............................... 2
Head Restraints......................................... 118
Headlights ................................................. 105
Aiming .................................................... 247
Automatic Operation ............................... 106
Dimming ......................................... 105, 107
Operating................................................ 105
Heated Door Mirrors................................ 110
Heaters (Seat) ........................................... 132
High-Beam Indicator .................................. 69
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver............ 165
Identification Numbers ............................ 308
Engine and Transmission ......................... 308
Vehicle Identification ............................... 308
Ignition Switch ......................................... 104
Illumination Control................................. 109
Knob....................................................... 109
Immobilizer System .................................... 98
Indicator.................................................... 70
Indicators .................................................... 64
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)..................... 66
Charging System ............................... 65, 290
CRUISE CONTROL ............................. 71, 202
CRUISE MAIN .................................... 71, 201
Door and Trunk Open ......................... 25, 68
EPS (Electric Power Steering) System.. 68, 292
Fog Light................................................... 70
High-Beam ................................................ 69
Immobilizer System ................................... 70
Lights On .................................................. 69
Low Fuel ................................................... 66
Low Oil Pressure................................ 64, 290
Low Tire Pressure/TPMS............. 68, 206, 208
Maintenance MinderTM ............................ 225
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............. 65, 291
Parking Brake and Brake System ............... 64
Seat Belt Reminder.............................. 27, 66
Security System Alarm............................... 71
Side Airbag Off ................................... 46, 70
Supplemental Restraint System ........... 44, 67
System Message ....................................... 69
Transmission ............................................. 65
Turn Signal ............................................... 69
VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist)
System ............................................ 67, 204
VSA® OFF.......................................... 67, 205
Information .............................................. 303
Information Buttons .................................. 76
Instant Fuel Economy ................................ 78
Instrument Panel........................................ 63
Brightness Control .................................. 109
Interior Lights........................................... 125
Interior Rearview Mirror ......................... 114
Jack (Wheel Nut Wrench)........................ 280
Jump Starting........................................... 284
Key Number Tag ........................................ 90
Keyless Lockout Prevention....................... 92
Keys............................................................. 89
Lockout Prevention ................................... 92
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 320 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Index A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
H
I
J
K
321
Number Tag.............................................. 90
Rear Door Won’t Open ............................. 94
Remote Transmitter .................................. 91
Retractable Master Keys............................ 89
Types and Functions.................................. 89
Valet Key .................................................. 90
Won’t Turn ............................................... 17
Kickdown (Automatic Transmission) ...... 194
Language (HFL) ........................................ 178
LATCH (Child Seats) ................................... 53
Lights ................................................ 105, 247
Automatic............................................... 106
Bulb Replacement ................................... 247
Daytime Running Lights .......................... 107
Fog Lights ............................................... 107
High-Beam Indicator ................................. 69
Interior.................................................... 125
Light Switches......................................... 105
Lights On Indicator.................................... 69
Turn Signals ............................................ 105
Load Limits ............................................... 185
Locking/Unlocking ..................................... 89
Auto Door Lock/Unlock............................. 94
Childproof Door Locks .............................. 94
From Inside ............................................... 93
From Outside ............................................ 91
Keys.......................................................... 89
Lockout Prevention System ....................... 92
Using a Key ............................................... 92
Lockout Prevention System........................ 92
Low Battery Charge.................................. 290
Low Fuel Indicator...................................... 66
Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 64, 290
Lower Anchors............................................ 53
Lubricant Specifications Chart ......... 305, 307
Luggage (Maximum Load Limit) ............. 185
Maintenance............................................. 221
Battery .................................................... 268
Brake/Clutch Fluid ................................... 244
Cleaning.................................................. 271
Climate Control....................................... 270
Coolant ................................................... 240
Maintenance MinderTM ............................ 225
Oil ........................................................... 235
Precautions.............................................. 222
Radiator .................................................. 241
Remote Transmitter ................................. 269
Replacing Light Bulbs............................... 247
Safety...................................................... 223
Service Items ........................................... 227
Tires ........................................................ 259
Transmission Fluid ................................... 242
Under the Hood ...................................... 229
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............. 65, 291
Manual Transmission................................ 199
Map Lights ................................................ 125
Maximum Load Limit ............................... 185
Meters, Gauges........................................... 75
Mirrors ...................................................... 114
Adjusting ................................................ 114
Automatic Dimming ................................ 114
Door ....................................................... 114
Exterior ................................................... 114
Interior Rearview ..................................... 114
Modifications (and Accessories) .............. 219
Moonroof ................................................. 103
MP3 ................................................... 147, 153
Multi-Information Display ......................... 76
Numbers (Identification).......................... 308
Odometer ................................................... 77
Oil (Engine)............................................... 234
Adding.................................................... 237
Checking................................................. 235
Displaying Oil Life.................................... 225
Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 64, 290
Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 234
Viscosity.................................................. 234
Opening/Closing
Hood....................................................... 231
Moonroof ............................................... 103
Power Windows...................................... 100
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 321 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Index A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
LM
N
O
322
Trunk......................................................... 95
Overheating.............................................. 288
Paddle Shifters (Sequential Shift
Mode) ................................................ 13, 198
Panic Mode ................................................. 99
Parking ...................................................... 214
Parking Brake............................................ 210
Parking Brake and Brake System
Indicator ............................................ 64, 292
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator ................. 45
Passing Indicators ..................................... 105
Power Windows........................................ 100
Precautions While Driving........................ 193
Rain......................................................... 193
Pregnant Women ....................................... 31
Puncture (Tire) .......................................... 277
Radiator..................................................... 241
Radio (AM/FM).......................................... 143
Radio Data System (RDS).......................... 144
Range .......................................................... 78
RDS (Radio Data System).......................... 144
Readiness Codes (Emissions Testing) ....... 311
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
Button...................................................... 110
Rear Seats (Folding Down)....................... 123
Rearview Mirror (Automatic Dimming).. 114
Refueling .................................................. 215
Fuel Gauge............................................ 8, 75
Gasoline.................................. 215, 304, 306
Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 66
Regulations............................... 208, 262, 309
Remote Transmitter ................................... 91
Replacement
Battery .................................................... 269
Bulbs....................................................... 247
Fuses....................................................... 294
Tires ........................................................ 265
Wiper Blade Rubber ................................ 257
Reporting Safety Defects ......................... 310
Resetting a Trip Meter ............................... 77
Retractable Master Keys ............................ 89
Reverse Tilt Mirror.................................... 115
Safe Driving ................................................ 21
Safety Check ............................................... 25
Safety Labels............................................... 61
Safety Message........................................... 20
Seat Belts .................................................... 26
Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor.................. 30
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners ................. 28
Checking................................................... 32
Fastening .................................................. 29
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder
Seat Belt.................................................. 55
Pregnant Women...................................... 31
Reminder .................................................. 27
Warning Indicator ............................... 27, 66
Seat Heaters ............................................. 132
Seats.......................................................... 116
Adjusting ................................................ 116
Driver’s Seat Lumbar Support.................. 120
Front Seats.............................................. 116
Rear Seats............................................... 123
Seat Heaters ........................................... 132
Security System .......................................... 98
Immobilizer System Indicator..................... 70
Security System Alarm Indicator ................ 71
SEL/RESET Knob.......................................... 76
Select Lever ................................ 13, 195, 199
Operation ................................. 13, 196, 199
Releasing ................................................ 287
Won’t Move ........................................... 287
Selecting a Child Seat ................................ 52
Selector Knob (Audio) ............................. 141
Sequential Shift Mode............................. 197
Setting the Clock........................................ 88
Shift Lever .................................. 13, 195, 199
Shift Position Indicator ............................ 196
Shifting (Transmission) .................... 195, 199
Shoulder Anchor ........................................ 30
Side Airbags ............................................... 40
Cutoff System........................................... 42
Off Indicator ............................................. 42
Side Curtain Airbags .................................. 43
Snow Tires ................................................ 267
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 322 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Index A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
P Q
R
S
323
Spare Tire ................................. 277, 305, 307
Spark Plugs ....................................... 304, 306
Specifications ........................................... 304
Specified Fuel ........................... 215, 304, 306
Speedometer.............................................. 75
SRS Airbags (Airbags) ................................ 36
Starting the Engine.................................. 191
Does Not Start ........................................ 283
Engine Switch Buzzer.............................. 104
Jump Starting ......................................... 284
Steering Wheel ........................................ 113
Adjusting ................................................ 113
Stopping ................................................... 214
Sunglasses Holder .................................... 131
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ....... 36
Switches (Around the Steering
Wheel) ............................................ 2, 3, 104
SYNC Mode .............................................. 135
System Message Indicator ......................... 69
Tachometer ................................................ 75
Temperature .............................................. 78
Gauge ........................................................ 8
Outside Temperature Display .................... 78
Temperature Sensor ................................ 136
Time (Setting)............................................. 88
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)..................................................... 206
Indicator ........................................... 68, 293
Tires ........................................................... 259
Air Pressure ............................. 260, 305, 307
Checking and Maintaining....................... 259
Inspection................................................ 259
Labeling .................................................. 260
Puncture (Flat Tire)................................... 277
Regulations ............................................. 262
Rotation .................................................. 266
Spare Tire ................................ 277, 305, 307
Tire Chains .............................................. 267
Wear Indicators ....................................... 264
Winter..................................................... 267
Tools .......................................................... 276
Towing a Trailer ....................................... 187
Equipment and Accessories ..................... 188
Load Limits .............................................. 187
Towing Your Vehicle ................................ 190
Emergency .............................................. 299
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring
System) .................................................... 206
Indicator............................................ 68, 293
Transmission ..................................... 195, 199
Automatic ............................................... 195
Fluid ................................................ 242, 243
Manual.................................................... 199
Number................................................... 308
Sequential Shift Mode ............................. 197
Shift Position Indicator ....................... 13, 196
Trip Meter ................................................... 77
Trip/Reset Switch ........................................ 77
Troubleshooting....................................... 275
Blown Fuse.............................................. 294
Brake Pedal Vibrates.................................. 17
Buzzer Sounds When Opening Door.......... 18
Emergency Towing.................................. 299
Engine Won’t Start.................................. 283
Noise When Braking.................................. 18
Overheating ............................................ 288
Premium Gasoline ................... 215, 304, 306
Puncture/Flat Tire .................................... 277
Rear Door Won’t Open........................ 17, 94
Select Lever Won’t Move......................... 287
Warning Indicators .................................... 64
Trunk........................................................... 95
Lid............................................................. 95
Light Bulb........................................ 304, 306
Main Switch.............................................. 97
Unable to Open....................................... 301
Turn Signals .............................................. 105
Indicators (Instrument Panel) ..................... 69
Unlocking the Doors .................................. 91
USB Adapter Cable........................... 138, 139
USB Flash Drives ....................................... 164
Valet Key..................................................... 90
Vanity Mirrors............................................... 5
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 323 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Index A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
T
U
V
324
Vehicle Identification Number................. 308
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®).................. 204
Off Button ............................................... 205
Off Indicator .............................................. 67
System Indicator ........................................ 67
Ventilation ................................................ 133
Viscosity (Oil)............................. 234, 305, 307
VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist) .................. 204
Warning and Information Messages ......... 72
Warning Indicator On/Blinking................ 290
Warning Labels ........................................... 61
Warranties (Warranty Manual provided
separately)............................................... 313
Watts ................................................. 304, 306
Wear Indicators (Tire)............................... 264
Wheel Nut Wrench (Jack Handle)............ 280
Window Washers...................................... 108
Adding/Refilling Fluid............................... 246
Switch ..................................................... 108
Windows (Opening and Closing)............. 100
Windshield ................................................ 108
Cleaning.................................................. 274
Defrosting/Defogging .............................. 134
Washer Fluid............................................ 246
Wiper Blades ........................................... 257
Wipers and Washers ................................ 108
Winter Tires............................................... 267
Snow Tires............................................... 267
Tire Chains .............................................. 267
Wipers and Washers................................. 108
Checking and Replacing Wiper Blades ..... 257
WMA ................................................. 147, 153
Worn Tires ................................................ 259
XM® Radio ................................................ 145
13 ACURA TSX 4D-31TL16400.book 324 ページ ２０１２年７月２７日　金曜日　午前１１時３１分
QRG
Index
2013 TSX
Index A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
W
X Y Z

Navigation menu